Implement -z dynamic-undefined-weak
[binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
832 @item -plugin @var{name}
833 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837 wish.
838
839 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845 just copy in the newest one.
846
847 @kindex --push-state
848 @cindex push state governing input file handling
849 @item --push-state
850 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864 something as follows:
865
866 @smallexample
867 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868 @end smallexample
869
870 @kindex --pop-state
871 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
872 @item --pop-state
873 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874 flags governing input file handling.
875
876 @kindex -q
877 @kindex --emit-relocs
878 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
879 @item -q
880 @itemx --emit-relocs
881 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
882 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884 in larger executables.
885
886 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
888 @kindex --force-dynamic
889 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890 @item --force-dynamic
891 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892 to VxWorks targets.
893
894 @cindex partial link
895 @cindex relocatable output
896 @kindex -r
897 @kindex --relocatable
898 @item -r
899 @itemx --relocatable
900 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
901 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
902 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904 @code{OMAGIC}.
905 @c ; see @option{-N}.
906 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
910 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914 with input files in other formats at all.
915
916 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918 @kindex -R @var{file}
919 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920 @cindex symbol-only input
921 @item -R @var{filename}
922 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926 programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
928 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
929 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
930 the @option{-rpath} option.
931
932 @kindex -s
933 @kindex --strip-all
934 @cindex strip all symbols
935 @item -s
936 @itemx --strip-all
937 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939 @kindex -S
940 @kindex --strip-debug
941 @cindex strip debugger symbols
942 @item -S
943 @itemx --strip-debug
944 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946 @kindex --strip-discarded
947 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
948 @item --strip-discarded
949 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
950 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951 Enabled by default.
952
953 @kindex -t
954 @kindex --trace
955 @cindex input files, displaying
956 @item -t
957 @itemx --trace
958 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
959
960 @kindex -T @var{script}
961 @kindex --script=@var{script}
962 @cindex script files
963 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
964 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
966 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
967 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
968 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971 options accumulate.
972
973 @kindex -dT @var{script}
974 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975 @cindex script files
976 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987 @samp{gcc}).
988
989 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
990 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991 @cindex undefined symbol
992 @item -u @var{symbol}
993 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
1000 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003 instead.
1004
1005 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006 @cindex symbols, require defined
1007 @cindex defined symbol
1008 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
1016 @kindex -Ur
1017 @cindex constructors
1018 @item -Ur
1019 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1021 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1022 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026 @samp{-r} for the others.
1027
1028 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029 @cindex orphan sections
1030 @cindex sections, orphan
1031 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037 @table @code
1038 @item place
1039 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1042
1043 @item discard
1044 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047 @item warn
1048 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049 issue a warning.
1050
1051 @item error
1052 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053 @end table
1054
1055 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
1057 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065 in a linker script.
1066
1067 @kindex -v
1068 @kindex -V
1069 @kindex --version
1070 @cindex version
1071 @item -v
1072 @itemx --version
1073 @itemx -V
1074 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1075 lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077 @kindex -x
1078 @kindex --discard-all
1079 @cindex deleting local symbols
1080 @item -x
1081 @itemx --discard-all
1082 Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084 @kindex -X
1085 @kindex --discard-locals
1086 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1087 @item -X
1088 @itemx --discard-locals
1089 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1092
1093 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095 @cindex symbol tracing
1096 @item -y @var{symbol}
1097 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100 to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1106 @item -Y @var{path}
1107 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108 for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111 @item -z @var{keyword}
1112 The recognized keywords are:
1113 @table @samp
1114
1115 @item combreloc
1116 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117 lookup caching possible.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121 link.
1122
1123 @item defs
1124 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1125 shared libraries are still allowed.
1126
1127 @item execstack
1128 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
1130 @item global
1131 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
1135 @item initfirst
1136 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141 objects.
1142
1143 @item interpose
1144 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145 but the primary executable.
1146
1147 @item lazy
1148 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151 Lazy binding is the default.
1152
1153 @item loadfltr
1154 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155 runtime.
1156
1157 @item muldefs
1158 Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160 @item nocombreloc
1161 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
1163 @item nocommon
1164 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165 link.
1166
1167 @item nocopyreloc
1168 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1170
1171 @item nodefaultlib
1172 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173 ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175 @item nodelete
1176 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178 @item nodlopen
1179 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181 @item nodump
1182 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
1184 @item noexecstack
1185 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
1187 @item text
1188 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190 @item notext
1191 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193 @item textoff
1194 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
1196 @item norelro
1197 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
1199 @item now
1200 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204 first called.
1205
1206 @item origin
1207 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
1209 @item relro
1210 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
1212 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
1218 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1219 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
1223 @item bndplt
1224 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
1226 @item noextern-protected-data
1227 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1231 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1232 i386 and x86-64.
1233
1234 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238 option.
1239
1240 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1241 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1246
1247 @item noreloc-overflow
1248 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
1252 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1253 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1254 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1255 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1256 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1257 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1258 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1259 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1260 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1261 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1262 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1263 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1264 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1265
1266 @end table
1267
1268 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1269
1270 @kindex -(
1271 @cindex groups of archives
1272 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1273 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1274 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1275 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1276
1277 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1278 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1279 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1280 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1281 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1282 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1283 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1284 resolved.
1285
1286 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1287 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1288 more archives.
1289
1290 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1291 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1292 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1293 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1294 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1295 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1296 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1297 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1298 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1299 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1300 restore the old behaviour.
1301
1302 @kindex --as-needed
1303 @kindex --no-as-needed
1304 @item --as-needed
1305 @itemx --no-as-needed
1306 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1307 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1308 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1309 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1310 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1311 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1312 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1313 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1314 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1315 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1316 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1317 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1318 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1319
1320 @kindex --add-needed
1321 @kindex --no-add-needed
1322 @item --add-needed
1323 @itemx --no-add-needed
1324 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1325 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1326 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1327 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1328
1329 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1330 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1331 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1332
1333 @kindex -Bdynamic
1334 @kindex -dy
1335 @kindex -call_shared
1336 @item -Bdynamic
1337 @itemx -dy
1338 @itemx -call_shared
1339 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1340 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1341 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1342 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1343 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1344 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1345
1346 @kindex -Bgroup
1347 @item -Bgroup
1348 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1349 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1350 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1351 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1352 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1353
1354 @kindex -Bstatic
1355 @kindex -dn
1356 @kindex -non_shared
1357 @kindex -static
1358 @item -Bstatic
1359 @itemx -dn
1360 @itemx -non_shared
1361 @itemx -static
1362 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1363 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1364 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1365 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1366 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1367 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1368 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1369 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1370 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1371 libraries.
1372
1373 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1374 @item -Bsymbolic
1375 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1376 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1377 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1378 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1379 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1380 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1381 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1382 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1383
1384 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1385 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1386 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1387 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1388 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1389 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1390 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1391 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1392 libraries and position independent executables.
1393
1394 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1395 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1396 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1397 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1398 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1399 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1400 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1401 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1402 which support shared libraries.
1403
1404 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1405 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1406
1407 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1408 @item --dynamic-list-data
1409 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1410
1411 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1412 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1413 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1414 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1415
1416 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1417 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1418 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1419
1420 @kindex --check-sections
1421 @kindex --no-check-sections
1422 @item --check-sections
1423 @itemx --no-check-sections
1424 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1425 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1426 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1427 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1428 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1429 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1430 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1431 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1432 option.
1433
1434 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1435 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1436 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1437 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1438 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1439 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1440 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1441 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1442 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1443 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1444 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1445 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1446
1447 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1448 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1449 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1450 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1451 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1452 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1453 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1454 symbols.
1455
1456 @cindex cross reference table
1457 @kindex --cref
1458 @item --cref
1459 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1460 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1461 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1462
1463 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1464 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1465 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1466 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1467 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1468 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1469 symbol are listed.
1470
1471 @cindex common allocation
1472 @kindex --no-define-common
1473 @item --no-define-common
1474 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1475 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1476 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1477
1478 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1479 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1480 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1481 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1482 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1483 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1484 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1485 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1486 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1487 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1488
1489 @cindex symbols, from command line
1490 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1491 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1492 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1493 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1494 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1495 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1496 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1497 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1498 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1499 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1500 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1501 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1502
1503 @cindex demangling, from command line
1504 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1505 @kindex --no-demangle
1506 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1507 @itemx --no-demangle
1508 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1509 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1510 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1511 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1512 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1513 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1514 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1515 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1516 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1517
1518 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1519 @kindex -I@var{file}
1520 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1521 @item -I@var{file}
1522 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1523 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1524 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1525 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1526 doing.
1527
1528 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1529 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1530 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1531 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1532 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1533 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1534
1535 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1536 @item --embedded-relocs
1537 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1538 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1539 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1540 targets.
1541
1542 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1543 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1544 @item --fatal-warnings
1545 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1546 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1547 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1548
1549 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1550 @item --force-exe-suffix
1551 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1552
1553 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1554 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1555 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1556 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1557 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1558 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1559
1560 @kindex --gc-sections
1561 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1562 @cindex garbage collection
1563 @item --gc-sections
1564 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1565 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1566 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1567 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1568 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1569 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1570 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1571
1572 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1573 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1574 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1575 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1576 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1577 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1578 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1579 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1580 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1581
1582 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1583 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1584 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1585 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1586
1587 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1588 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1589 @cindex garbage collection
1590 @item --print-gc-sections
1591 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1592 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1593 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1594 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1595 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1596 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1597 line.
1598
1599 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1600 @cindex garbage collection
1601 @item --gc-keep-exported
1602 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1603 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1604 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1605 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1606 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1607 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1608 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1609 ELF format targets.
1610
1611 @kindex --print-output-format
1612 @cindex output format
1613 @item --print-output-format
1614 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1615 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1616 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1617
1618 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1619 @cindex memory usage
1620 @item --print-memory-usage
1621 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1622 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1623 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1624 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1625 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1626
1627 @smallexample
1628 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1629 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1630 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1631 @end smallexample
1632
1633 @cindex help
1634 @cindex usage
1635 @kindex --help
1636 @item --help
1637 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1638
1639 @kindex --target-help
1640 @item --target-help
1641 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1642
1643 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1644 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1645 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1646 @option{-M} option, above.
1647
1648 @cindex memory usage
1649 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1650 @item --no-keep-memory
1651 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1652 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1653 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1654 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1655 while linking a large executable.
1656
1657 @kindex --no-undefined
1658 @kindex -z defs
1659 @item --no-undefined
1660 @itemx -z defs
1661 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1662 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1663 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1664 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1665 libraries being linked in.
1666
1667 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1668 @kindex -z muldefs
1669 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1670 @itemx -z muldefs
1671 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1672 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1673 first definition will be used.
1674
1675 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1676 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1677 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1678 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1679 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1680 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1681 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1682 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1683 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1684
1685 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1686 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1687 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1688 a shared library.
1689
1690 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1691 libraries specified at link time are that:
1692
1693 @itemize @bullet
1694 @item
1695 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1696 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1697 resolvable at load time.
1698 @item
1699 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1700 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1701
1702 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1703 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1704 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1705 appropriate memset function.
1706 @end itemize
1707
1708 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1709 @item --no-undefined-version
1710 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1711 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1712 will be issued instead.
1713
1714 @kindex --default-symver
1715 @item --default-symver
1716 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1717 exported symbols.
1718
1719 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1720 @item --default-imported-symver
1721 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1722 imported symbols.
1723
1724 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1725 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1726 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1727 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1728 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1729 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1730 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1731 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1732 inappropriate.
1733
1734 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1735 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1736 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1737 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1738
1739 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1740 @item --no-whole-archive
1741 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1742 archive files.
1743
1744 @cindex output file after errors
1745 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1746 @item --noinhibit-exec
1747 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1748 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1749 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1750 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1751
1752 @kindex -nostdlib
1753 @item -nostdlib
1754 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1755 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1756 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1757
1758 @ifclear SingleFormat
1759 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1760 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1761 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1762 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1763 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1764 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1765 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1766 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1767 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1768 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1769 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1770 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1771 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1772 @end ifclear
1773
1774 @kindex --out-implib
1775 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1776 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1777 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1778 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1779 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1780 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1781 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1782 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1783
1784 @kindex -pie
1785 @kindex --pic-executable
1786 @item -pie
1787 @itemx --pic-executable
1788 @cindex position independent executables
1789 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1790 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1791 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1792 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1793 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1794 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1795
1796 @kindex -qmagic
1797 @item -qmagic
1798 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1799
1800 @kindex -Qy
1801 @item -Qy
1802 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1803
1804 @kindex --relax
1805 @cindex synthesizing linker
1806 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1807 @cindex --no-relax
1808 @item --relax
1809 @itemx --no-relax
1810 An option with machine dependent effects.
1811 @ifset GENERIC
1812 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1813 @end ifset
1814 @ifset H8300
1815 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1816 @end ifset
1817 @ifset I960
1818 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1819 @end ifset
1820 @ifset XTENSA
1821 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1822 @end ifset
1823 @ifset M68HC11
1824 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1825 @end ifset
1826 @ifset NIOSII
1827 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1828 @end ifset
1829 @ifset POWERPC
1830 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1831 @end ifset
1832
1833 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1834 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1835 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1836 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1837 instructions, and combining constant values.
1838
1839 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1840 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1841 @ifset GENERIC
1842 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1843 family of processors.
1844 @end ifset
1845
1846 @ifset GENERIC
1847 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1848 but ignored.
1849 @end ifset
1850
1851 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1852 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1853
1854 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1855 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1856 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1857 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1858 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1859 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1860 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1861 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1862 @ifset GENERIC
1863 (such as VxWorks)
1864 @end ifset
1865 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1866 run-time memory.
1867
1868 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1869 or symbols needed for relocations.
1870
1871 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1872 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1873
1874 @ifset GENERIC
1875 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1876 @cindex runtime library search path
1877 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1878 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1879 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1880 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1881 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1882 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1883 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1884 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1885 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1886 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1887
1888 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1889 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1890 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1891 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1892 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1893 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1894 file systems.
1895
1896 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1897 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1898 the @option{-rpath} option.
1899 @end ifset
1900
1901 @ifset GENERIC
1902 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1903 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1904 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1905 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1906 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1907 of the input files.
1908
1909 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1910 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1911 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1912 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1913 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1914 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1915 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1916 appearing multiple times.
1917
1918 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1919 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1920 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1921 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1922 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1923
1924 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1925 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1926 supported.
1927
1928 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1929 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1930 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1931 runtime linker would do.
1932
1933 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1934 libraries:
1935 @enumerate
1936 @item
1937 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1938 @item
1939 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1940 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1941 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1942 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1943 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1944 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1945 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1946 @item
1947 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1948 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1949 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1950 @item
1951 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1952 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1953 @item
1954 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1955 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1956 @item
1957 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1958 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1959 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1960 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1961 @item
1962 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1963 @item
1964 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1965 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1966 @end enumerate
1967
1968 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1969 warning and continue with the link.
1970 @end ifset
1971
1972 @kindex -shared
1973 @kindex -Bshareable
1974 @item -shared
1975 @itemx -Bshareable
1976 @cindex shared libraries
1977 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1978 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1979 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1980 undefined symbols in the link.
1981
1982 @kindex --sort-common
1983 @item --sort-common
1984 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1985 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1986 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1987 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1988 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1989 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1990 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1991 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1992
1993 @kindex --sort-section=name
1994 @item --sort-section=name
1995 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1996 patterns in the linker script.
1997
1998 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1999 @item --sort-section=alignment
2000 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2001 patterns in the linker script.
2002
2003 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2004 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2005 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2006 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2007 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2008
2009 @kindex --split-by-file
2010 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2011 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2012 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2013 size of 1 if not given.
2014
2015 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2016 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2017 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2018 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2019 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2020 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2021 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2022 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2023 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2024 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2025 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2026 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2027
2028 @kindex --stats
2029 @item --stats
2030 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2031 as execution time and memory usage.
2032
2033 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2034 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2035 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2036 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2037 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2038
2039 @kindex --task-link
2040 @item --task-link
2041 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2042 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2043
2044 @kindex --traditional-format
2045 @cindex traditional format
2046 @item --traditional-format
2047 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2048 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2049 use the traditional format instead.
2050
2051 @cindex dbx
2052 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2053 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2054 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2055 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2056 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2057 combine duplicate entries.
2058
2059 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2060 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2061 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2062 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2063 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2064 line.
2065 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2066 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2067 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2068 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2069 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2070
2071 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2072 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2073 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2074 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2075 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2076 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2077 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2078 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2079 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2080
2081 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2082 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2083 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2084 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2085 byte of the text segment.
2086
2087 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2088 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2089 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2090 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2091 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2092 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2093
2094 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2095 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2096 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2097 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2098 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2099
2100 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2101 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2102 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2103 values for @samp{method}:
2104
2105 @table @samp
2106 @item ignore-all
2107 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2108
2109 @item report-all
2110 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2111
2112 @item ignore-in-object-files
2113 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2114 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2115
2116 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2117 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2118 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2119 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2120 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2121 command line.
2122 @end table
2123
2124 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2125 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2126
2127 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2128 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2129 can change this to a warning.
2130
2131 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2132 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2133 @item --dll-verbose
2134 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2135 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2136 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2137 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2138 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2139
2140 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2141 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2142 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2143 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2144 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2145 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2146 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2147 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2148 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2149 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2150 @xref{WIN32}.
2151
2152 @kindex --warn-common
2153 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2154 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2155 @item --warn-common
2156 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2157 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2158 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2159 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2160 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2161 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2162
2163 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2164
2165 @table @samp
2166 @item int i = 1;
2167 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2168 file.
2169
2170 @item extern int i;
2171 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2172 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2173 variable somewhere.
2174
2175 @item int i;
2176 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2177 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2178 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2179 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2180 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2181 a definition of the same variable.
2182 @end table
2183
2184 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2185 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2186 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2187 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2188 a common symbol.
2189
2190 @enumerate
2191 @item
2192 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2193 definition for the symbol.
2194 @smallexample
2195 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2196 overridden by definition
2197 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2198 @end smallexample
2199
2200 @item
2201 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2202 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2203 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2204 @smallexample
2205 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2206 overriding common
2207 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2208 @end smallexample
2209
2210 @item
2211 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2212 @smallexample
2213 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2214 of `@var{symbol}'
2215 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2216 @end smallexample
2217
2218 @item
2219 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2220 @smallexample
2221 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2222 overridden by larger common
2223 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2224 @end smallexample
2225
2226 @item
2227 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2228 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2229 encountered in a different order.
2230 @smallexample
2231 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2232 overriding smaller common
2233 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2234 @end smallexample
2235 @end enumerate
2236
2237 @kindex --warn-constructors
2238 @item --warn-constructors
2239 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2240 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2241 detect the use of global constructors.
2242
2243 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2244 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2245 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2246 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2247 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2248 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2249 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2250 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2251 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2252 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2253 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2254 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2255 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2256
2257 @kindex --warn-once
2258 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2259 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2260 @item --warn-once
2261 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2262 which refers to it.
2263
2264 @kindex --warn-section-align
2265 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2266 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2267 @item --warn-section-align
2268 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2269 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2270 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2271 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2272 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2273
2274 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2275 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2276 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2277
2278 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2279 @item --warn-alternate-em
2280 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2281
2282 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2283 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2284 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2285 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2286 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2287
2288 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2289 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2290 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2291 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2292
2293 @kindex --whole-archive
2294 @cindex including an entire archive
2295 @item --whole-archive
2296 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2297 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2298 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2299 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2300 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2301 library. This option may be used more than once.
2302
2303 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2304 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2305 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2306 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2307 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2308
2309 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2310 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2311 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2312 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2313 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2314 @var{symbol}.
2315
2316 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2317 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2318 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2319 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2320
2321 Here is a trivial example:
2322
2323 @smallexample
2324 void *
2325 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2326 @{
2327 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2328 return __real_malloc (c);
2329 @}
2330 @end smallexample
2331
2332 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2333 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2334 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2335 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2336
2337 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2338 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2339 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2340 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2341 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2342
2343 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2344 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2345 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2346 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2347 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2348 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2349 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2350
2351 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2352 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2353 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2354 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2355 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2356
2357 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2358 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2359 @item --enable-new-dtags
2360 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2361 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2362 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2363 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2364 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2365 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2366 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2367 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2368
2369 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2370 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2371 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2372 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2373 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2374 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2375 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2376
2377 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2378 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2379 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2380 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2381 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2382 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2383 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2384
2385 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2386 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2387 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2388 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2389 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2390 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2391 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2392 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2393 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2394 compressed using zlib.
2395
2396 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2397 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2398 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2399 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2400 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2401 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2402
2403 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2404 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2405
2406 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2407 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2408 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2409 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2410
2411 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2412 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2413 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2414 @option{--help} option.
2415
2416 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2417 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2418 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2419 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2420 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2421 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2422
2423 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2424 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2425 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2426 has been used.
2427
2428 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2429 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2430
2431 @kindex --build-id
2432 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2433 @item --build-id
2434 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2435 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2436 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2437 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2438 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2439 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2440 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2441 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2442 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2443 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2444 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2445
2446 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2447 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2448 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2449 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2450 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2451 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2452
2453 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2454 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2455 @end table
2456
2457 @c man end
2458
2459 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2460
2461 @c man begin OPTIONS
2462
2463 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2464 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2465 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2466 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2467 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2468 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2469 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2470 object file).
2471
2472 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2473 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2474 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2475 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2476
2477 @table @gcctabopt
2478
2479 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2480 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2481 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2482 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @kindex --base-file
2486 @item --base-file @var{file}
2487 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2488 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2489 @file{dlltool}.
2490 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2491
2492 @kindex --dll
2493 @item --dll
2494 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2495 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2496 file.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2500 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2501 @item --enable-long-section-names
2502 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2503 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2504 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2505 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2506 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2507 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2508 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2509 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2510 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2511 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2512 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2513 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2514 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2515 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2516 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2517 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2518 image and not stripping symbols.
2519 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2520
2521 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2522 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2523 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2524 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2525 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2526 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2527 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2528 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2529 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2530 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2531 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2532 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2533 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2534 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2535 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2536 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2537 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2538 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2539
2540 @kindex --leading-underscore
2541 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2542 @item --leading-underscore
2543 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2544 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2545 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2546 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2547
2548 @cindex DLLs, creating
2549 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2550 @item --export-all-symbols
2551 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2552 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2553 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2554 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2555 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2556 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2557 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2558 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2559 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2560 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2561 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2562 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2563 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2564 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2565 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2566 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2567 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2568 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2569 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2570 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2571 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2572 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2573 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2574
2575 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2576 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2577 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2578 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2579 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2580
2581 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2582 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2583 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2584 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2585
2586 @kindex --file-alignment
2587 @item --file-alignment
2588 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2589 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2590 512.
2591 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2592
2593 @cindex heap size
2594 @kindex --heap
2595 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2596 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2597 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2598 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2599 committed.
2600 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2601
2602 @cindex image base
2603 @kindex --image-base
2604 @item --image-base @var{value}
2605 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2606 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2607 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2608 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2609 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2610 for dlls.
2611 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612
2613 @kindex --kill-at
2614 @item --kill-at
2615 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2616 symbols before they are exported.
2617 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2618
2619 @kindex --large-address-aware
2620 @item --large-address-aware
2621 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2622 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2623 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2624 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2625 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2626 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2627
2628 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2629 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2630 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2631 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2632 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2633 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2634 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2635
2636 @kindex --major-image-version
2637 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2638 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2640
2641 @kindex --major-os-version
2642 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2643 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2644 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2645
2646 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2647 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2648 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2649 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2650
2651 @kindex --minor-image-version
2652 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2653 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2654 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --minor-os-version
2657 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2658 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2659 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2660
2661 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2662 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2663 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2664 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2665
2666 @cindex DEF files, creating
2667 @cindex DLLs, creating
2668 @kindex --output-def
2669 @item --output-def @var{file}
2670 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2671 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2672 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2673 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2674 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2675 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2676
2677 @cindex DLLs, creating
2678 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2679 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2680 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2681 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2682 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2683 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2684 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2685 execution are avoided.
2686 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2687
2688 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2689 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2690 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2691 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2692 default.
2693 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2694
2695 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2696 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2697 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2698 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2699 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2700 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2701 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2702 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2703 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2704 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2705
2706 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2707 @item --enable-auto-import
2708 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2709 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2710 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2711 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2712 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2713 specification published by Microsoft.
2714
2715 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2716 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2717 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2718 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2719 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2720
2721 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2722 see this message:
2723
2724 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2725 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2726
2727 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2728 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2729 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2730 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2731 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2732 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2733 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2734 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2735 the warning, and exit.
2736
2737 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2738 data type of the exported variable:
2739
2740 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2741 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2742 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2743
2744 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2745 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2746 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2747 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2748
2749 @example
2750 extern type extern_array[];
2751 extern_array[1] -->
2752 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2753 @end example
2754
2755 or
2756
2757 @example
2758 extern type extern_array[];
2759 extern_array[1] -->
2760 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2761 @end example
2762
2763 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2764 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2765
2766 @example
2767 extern struct s extern_struct;
2768 extern_struct.field -->
2769 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2770 @end example
2771
2772 or
2773
2774 @example
2775 extern long long extern_ll;
2776 extern_ll -->
2777 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2778 @end example
2779
2780 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2781 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2782 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2783 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2784 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2785 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2786 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2787 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2788
2789 Original:
2790 @example
2791 --foo.h
2792 extern int arr[];
2793 --foo.c
2794 #include "foo.h"
2795 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2796 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2797 @}
2798 @end example
2799
2800 Solution 1:
2801 @example
2802 --foo.h
2803 extern int arr[];
2804 --foo.c
2805 #include "foo.h"
2806 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2807 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2808 volatile int *parr = arr;
2809 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2810 @}
2811 @end example
2812
2813 Solution 2:
2814 @example
2815 --foo.h
2816 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2817 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2818 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2819 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2820 #else
2821 #define FOO_IMPORT
2822 #endif
2823 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2824 --foo.c
2825 #include "foo.h"
2826 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2827 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2828 @}
2829 @end example
2830
2831 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2832 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2833 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2834 functions).
2835 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2836
2837 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2838 @item --disable-auto-import
2839 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2840 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2841 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2842
2843 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2844 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2845 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2846 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2847 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2848 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2849 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2850
2851 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2852 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2853 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2854 DLLs.
2855 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2856
2857 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2858 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2859 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2860 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2861
2862 @kindex --section-alignment
2863 @item --section-alignment
2864 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2865 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2866 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2867
2868 @cindex stack size
2869 @kindex --stack
2870 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2871 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2872 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2873 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2874 committed.
2875 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2876
2877 @kindex --subsystem
2878 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2879 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2880 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2881 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2882 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2883 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2884 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2885 @var{which}.
2886 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2887
2888 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2889 of the PE file header:
2890 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2891
2892 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2893 @item --high-entropy-va
2894 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2895 (ASLR).
2896
2897 @kindex --dynamicbase
2898 @item --dynamicbase
2899 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2900 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2901 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2902
2903 @kindex --forceinteg
2904 @item --forceinteg
2905 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2906
2907 @kindex --nxcompat
2908 @item --nxcompat
2909 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2910 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2911
2912 @kindex --no-isolation
2913 @item --no-isolation
2914 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2915
2916 @kindex --no-seh
2917 @item --no-seh
2918 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2919 this image.
2920
2921 @kindex --no-bind
2922 @item --no-bind
2923 Do not bind this image.
2924
2925 @kindex --wdmdriver
2926 @item --wdmdriver
2927 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2928
2929 @kindex --tsaware
2930 @item --tsaware
2931 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2932
2933 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2934 @item --insert-timestamp
2935 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2936 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2937 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2938 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2939 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2940 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2941 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2942 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2943 identically.
2944 @end table
2945
2946 @c man end
2947
2948 @ifset C6X
2949 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2950
2951 @c man begin OPTIONS
2952
2953 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2954 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2955 all executables use an index of 0.
2956
2957 @table @gcctabopt
2958
2959 @kindex --dsbt-size
2960 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2961 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2962 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2963 entries.
2964
2965 @kindex --dsbt-index
2966 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2967 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2968 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2969 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2970 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2971
2972 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2973 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2974 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2975
2976 @end table
2977
2978 @c man end
2979 @end ifset
2980
2981 @ifset M68HC11
2982 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2983
2984 @c man begin OPTIONS
2985
2986 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2987 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2988
2989 @table @gcctabopt
2990
2991 @kindex --no-trampoline
2992 @item --no-trampoline
2993 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2994 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2995 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2996
2997 @kindex --bank-window
2998 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2999 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3000 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3001 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3002 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3003
3004 @end table
3005
3006 @c man end
3007 @end ifset
3008
3009 @ifset M68K
3010 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3011
3012 @c man begin OPTIONS
3013
3014 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3015 when linking for 68K targets.
3016
3017 @table @gcctabopt
3018
3019 @kindex --got
3020 @item --got=@var{type}
3021 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3022 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3023 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3024 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3025
3026 @end table
3027
3028 @c man end
3029 @end ifset
3030
3031 @ifset MIPS
3032 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3033
3034 @c man begin OPTIONS
3035
3036 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3037 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3038 linking for MIPS targets.
3039
3040 @table @gcctabopt
3041
3042 @kindex --insn32
3043 @item --insn32
3044 @kindex --no-insn32
3045 @itemx --no-insn32
3046 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3047 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3048 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3049 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3050 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3051 possible.
3052
3053 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3054 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3055 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3056 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3057 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3058 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3059 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3060 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3061 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3062 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3063 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3064 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3065 an error.
3066
3067 @end table
3068
3069 @c man end
3070 @end ifset
3071
3072 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3073 @node Environment
3074 @section Environment Variables
3075
3076 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3077
3078 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3079 @ifclear SingleFormat
3080 @code{GNUTARGET},
3081 @end ifclear
3082 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3083
3084 @ifclear SingleFormat
3085 @kindex GNUTARGET
3086 @cindex default input format
3087 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3088 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3089 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3090 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3091 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3092 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3093 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3094 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3095 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3096 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3097 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3098 @end ifclear
3099
3100 @kindex LDEMULATION
3101 @cindex default emulation
3102 @cindex emulation, default
3103 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3104 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3105 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3106 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3107 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3108 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3109 linker was configured.
3110
3111 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3112 @cindex demangling, default
3113 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3114 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3115 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3116 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3117 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3118 options.
3119
3120 @c man end
3121 @end ifset
3122
3123 @node Scripts
3124 @chapter Linker Scripts
3125
3126 @cindex scripts
3127 @cindex linker scripts
3128 @cindex command files
3129 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3130 written in the linker command language.
3131
3132 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3133 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3134 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3135 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3136 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3137 described below.
3138
3139 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3140 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3141 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3142 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3143 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3144
3145 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3146 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3147 default linker script.
3148
3149 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3150 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3151 Linker Scripts}.
3152
3153 @menu
3154 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3155 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3156 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3157 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3158 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3159 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3160 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3161 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3162 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3163 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3164 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3165 @end menu
3166
3167 @node Basic Script Concepts
3168 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3169 @cindex linker script concepts
3170 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3171 describe the linker script language.
3172
3173 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3174 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3175 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3176 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3177 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3178 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3179 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3180 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3181
3182 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3183 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3184 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3185 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3186 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3187 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3188 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3189 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3190 of debugging information.
3191
3192 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3193 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3194 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3195 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3196 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3197 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3198 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3199 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3200 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3201 RAM address would be the VMA.
3202
3203 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3204 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3205
3206 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3207 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3208 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3209 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3210 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3211 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3212 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3213
3214 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3215 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3216 option.
3217
3218 @node Script Format
3219 @section Linker Script Format
3220 @cindex linker script format
3221 Linker scripts are text files.
3222
3223 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3224 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3225 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3226 generally ignored.
3227
3228 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3229 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3230 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3231 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3232 file name.
3233
3234 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3235 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3236 to whitespace.
3237
3238 @node Simple Example
3239 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3240 @cindex linker script example
3241 @cindex example of linker script
3242 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3243
3244 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3245 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3246 memory layout of the output file.
3247
3248 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3249 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3250 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3251 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3252 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3253 your input files.
3254
3255 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3256 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3257 linker script which will do that:
3258 @smallexample
3259 SECTIONS
3260 @{
3261 . = 0x10000;
3262 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3263 . = 0x8000000;
3264 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3265 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3266 @}
3267 @end smallexample
3268
3269 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3270 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3271 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3272
3273 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3274 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3275 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3276 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3277 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3278 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3279 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3280
3281 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3282 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3283 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3284 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3285 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3286 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3287
3288 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3289 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3290 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3291
3292 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3293 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3294 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3295 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3296 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3297 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3298 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3299
3300 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3301 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3302 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3303 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3304 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3305 sections.
3306
3307 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3308
3309 @node Simple Commands
3310 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3311 @cindex linker script simple commands
3312 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3313
3314 @menu
3315 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3316 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3317 @ifclear SingleFormat
3318 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3319 @end ifclear
3320
3321 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3322 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3323 @end menu
3324
3325 @node Entry Point
3326 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3327 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3328 @cindex start of execution
3329 @cindex first instruction
3330 @cindex entry point
3331 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3332 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3333 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3334 @smallexample
3335 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3336 @end smallexample
3337
3338 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3339 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3340 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3341 @itemize @bullet
3342 @item
3343 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3344 @item
3345 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3346 @item
3347 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3348 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3349 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3350 @item
3351 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3352 @item
3353 The address @code{0}.
3354 @end itemize
3355
3356 @node File Commands
3357 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3358 @cindex linker script file commands
3359 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3360
3361 @table @code
3362 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3363 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3364 @cindex including a linker script
3365 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3366 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3367 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3368 10 levels deep.
3369
3370 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3371 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3372
3373 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3374 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3375 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3376 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3377 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3378 @cindex linker script input object files
3379 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3380 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3381
3382 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3383 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3384 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3385
3386 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3387 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3388
3389 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3390 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3391 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3392 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3393 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3394 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3395 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3396 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3397 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3398
3399 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3400 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3401 @samp{-l}.
3402
3403 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3404 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3405 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3406
3407 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3408 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3409 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3410 @cindex grouping input files
3411 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3412 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3413 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3414 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3415
3416 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3417 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3418 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3419 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3420 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3421 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3422 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3423 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3424 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3425 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3426 setting afterwards.
3427
3428 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3429 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3430 @cindex output file name in linker script
3431 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3432 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3433 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3434 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3435 precedence.
3436
3437 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3438 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3439
3440 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3441 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3442 @cindex library search path in linker script
3443 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3444 @cindex search path in linker script
3445 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3446 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3447 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3448 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3449 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3450 the command line option are searched first.
3451
3452 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3453 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3454 @cindex first input file
3455 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3456 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3457 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3458 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3459 first file.
3460 @end table
3461
3462 @ifclear SingleFormat
3463 @node Format Commands
3464 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3465 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3466
3467 @table @code
3468 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3469 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3470 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3471 @cindex output file format in linker script
3472 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3473 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3474 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3475 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3476 line option takes precedence.
3477
3478 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3479 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3480 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3481 desired endianness.
3482
3483 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3484 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3485 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3486 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3487
3488 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3489 command:
3490 @smallexample
3491 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3492 @end smallexample
3493 This says that the default format for the output file is
3494 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3495 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3496 format.
3497
3498 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3499 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3500 @cindex input file format in linker script
3501 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3502 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3503 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3504 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3505 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3506 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3507 @end table
3508 @end ifclear
3509
3510 @node REGION_ALIAS
3511 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3512 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3513 @cindex region alias
3514 @cindex region names
3515
3516 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3517 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3518
3519 @smallexample
3520 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3521 @end smallexample
3522
3523 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3524 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3525 to memory regions. An example follows.
3526
3527 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3528 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3529 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3530 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3531 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3532 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3533 sections:
3534
3535 @itemize @bullet
3536 @item
3537 @code{.text} program code;
3538 @item
3539 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3540 @item
3541 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3542 @item
3543 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3544 @end itemize
3545
3546 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3547 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3548 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3549 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3550 @code{C}:
3551 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3552 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3553 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3554 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3555 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3556 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3557 @end multitable
3558 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3559 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3560 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3561 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3562
3563 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3564 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3565 memory layout:
3566 @smallexample
3567 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3568
3569 SECTIONS
3570 @{
3571 .text :
3572 @{
3573 *(.text)
3574 @} > REGION_TEXT
3575 .rodata :
3576 @{
3577 *(.rodata)
3578 rodata_end = .;
3579 @} > REGION_RODATA
3580 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3581 @{
3582 data_start = .;
3583 *(.data)
3584 @} > REGION_DATA
3585 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3586 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3587 .bss :
3588 @{
3589 *(.bss)
3590 @} > REGION_BSS
3591 @}
3592 @end smallexample
3593
3594 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3595 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3596 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3597 @table @code
3598 @item A
3599 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3600 @smallexample
3601 MEMORY
3602 @{
3603 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3604 @}
3605
3606 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3607 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3608 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3609 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3610 @end smallexample
3611 @item B
3612 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3613 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3614 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3615 @smallexample
3616 MEMORY
3617 @{
3618 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3619 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3620 @}
3621
3622 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3623 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3624 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3625 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3626 @end smallexample
3627 @item C
3628 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3629 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3630 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3631 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3632 @smallexample
3633 MEMORY
3634 @{
3635 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3636 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3637 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3638 @}
3639
3640 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3641 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3642 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3643 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3644 @end smallexample
3645 @end table
3646
3647 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3648 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3649 necessary:
3650 @smallexample
3651 #include <string.h>
3652
3653 extern char data_start [];
3654 extern char data_size [];
3655 extern char data_load_start [];
3656
3657 void copy_data(void)
3658 @{
3659 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3660 @{
3661 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3662 @}
3663 @}
3664 @end smallexample
3665
3666 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3667 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3668 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3669
3670 @table @code
3671 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3672 @kindex ASSERT
3673 @cindex assertion in linker script
3674 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3675 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3676
3677 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3678 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3679 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3680 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3681 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3682
3683 @smallexample
3684 .stack :
3685 @{
3686 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3687 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3688 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3689 @}
3690 @end smallexample
3691
3692 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3693 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3694 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3695
3696 @smallexample
3697 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3698 .stack :
3699 @{
3700 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3701 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3702 @}
3703 @end smallexample
3704
3705 will work.
3706
3707 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3708 @kindex EXTERN
3709 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3710 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3711 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3712 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3713 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3714 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3715
3716 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3717 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3718 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3719 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3720 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3721 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3722
3723 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3724 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3725 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3726 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3727 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3728 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3729
3730 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3731 @kindex INSERT
3732 @cindex insert user script into default script
3733 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3734 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3735 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3736 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3737 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3738 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3739 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3740 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3741 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3742 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3743 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3744 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3745 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3746
3747 @smallexample
3748 SECTIONS
3749 @{
3750 OVERLAY :
3751 @{
3752 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3753 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3754 @}
3755 @}
3756 INSERT AFTER .text;
3757 @end smallexample
3758
3759 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3760 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3761 @cindex cross references
3762 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3763 references among certain output sections.
3764
3765 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3766 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3767 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3768 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3769 a function defined in the other section.
3770
3771 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3772 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3773 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3774 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3775 names.
3776
3777 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3778 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3779 @cindex cross references
3780 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3781 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3782
3783 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3784 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3785 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3786 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3787 must never call back.
3788
3789 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3790 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3791 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3792 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3793 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3794 names, not input section names.
3795
3796 @ifclear SingleFormat
3797 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3798 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3799 @cindex machine architecture
3800 @cindex architecture
3801 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3802 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3803 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3804 the @samp{-f} option.
3805 @end ifclear
3806
3807 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3808 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3809 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3810 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3811 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3812 @xref{Expression Section}.
3813 @end table
3814
3815 @node Assignments
3816 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3817 @cindex assignment in scripts
3818 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3819 @cindex variables, defining
3820 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3821 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3822
3823 @menu
3824 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3825 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3826 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3827 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3828 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3829 @end menu
3830
3831 @node Simple Assignments
3832 @subsection Simple Assignments
3833
3834 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3835
3836 @table @code
3837 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3838 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3839 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3840 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3841 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3842 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3843 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3844 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3845 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3846 @end table
3847
3848 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3849 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3850 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3851
3852 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3853 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3854
3855 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3856
3857 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3858
3859 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3860 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3861 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3862
3863 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3864 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3865
3866 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3867 assignments may be used:
3868
3869 @smallexample
3870 floating_point = 0;
3871 SECTIONS
3872 @{
3873 .text :
3874 @{
3875 *(.text)
3876 _etext = .;
3877 @}
3878 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3879 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3880 @}
3881 @end smallexample
3882 @noindent
3883 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3884 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3885 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3886 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3887 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3888
3889 @node HIDDEN
3890 @subsection HIDDEN
3891 @cindex HIDDEN
3892 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3893 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3894
3895 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3896 @code{HIDDEN}:
3897
3898 @smallexample
3899 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3900 SECTIONS
3901 @{
3902 .text :
3903 @{
3904 *(.text)
3905 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3906 @}
3907 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3908 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3909 @}
3910 @end smallexample
3911 @noindent
3912 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3913
3914 @node PROVIDE
3915 @subsection PROVIDE
3916 @cindex PROVIDE
3917 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3918 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3919 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3920 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3921 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3922 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3923 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3924 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3925
3926 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3927 @smallexample
3928 SECTIONS
3929 @{
3930 .text :
3931 @{
3932 *(.text)
3933 _etext = .;
3934 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3935 @}
3936 @}
3937 @end smallexample
3938
3939 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3940 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3941 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3942 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3943 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3944 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3945
3946 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3947 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3948 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3949 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3950 hidden and won't be exported.
3951
3952 @node Source Code Reference
3953 @subsection Source Code Reference
3954
3955 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3956 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3957 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3958 symbol that does not have a value.
3959
3960 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3961 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3962 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3963 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3964 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3965 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3966 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3967 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3968
3969 @smallexample
3970 extern int foo;
3971 @end smallexample
3972
3973 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3974
3975 @smallexample
3976 _foo = 1000;
3977 @end smallexample
3978
3979 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3980 transformation has taken place.
3981
3982 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3983 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3984 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3985 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3986 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3987 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3988 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3989
3990 @smallexample
3991 int foo = 1000;
3992 @end smallexample
3993
3994 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3995 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3996 number 1000 is initially stored.
3997
3998 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3999 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4000 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4001 So:
4002
4003 @smallexample
4004 foo = 1;
4005 @end smallexample
4006
4007 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4008 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4009 address. Whereas:
4010
4011 @smallexample
4012 int * a = & foo;
4013 @end smallexample
4014
4015 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4016 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4017 the variable @samp{a}.
4018
4019 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4020 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4021 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4022
4023 @smallexample
4024 foo = 1000;
4025 @end smallexample
4026
4027 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4028 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4029 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4030 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4031 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4032
4033 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4034 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4035 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4036 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4037 linker script contains these declarations:
4038
4039 @smallexample
4040 @group
4041 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4042 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4043 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4044 @end group
4045 @end smallexample
4046
4047 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4048
4049 @smallexample
4050 @group
4051 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4052
4053 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4054 @end group
4055 @end smallexample
4056
4057 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4058 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4059 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4060
4061 @smallexample
4062 @group
4063 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4064
4065 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4066 @end group
4067 @end smallexample
4068
4069 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4070 operators.
4071
4072 @node SECTIONS
4073 @section SECTIONS Command
4074 @kindex SECTIONS
4075 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4076 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4077
4078 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4079 @smallexample
4080 SECTIONS
4081 @{
4082 @var{sections-command}
4083 @var{sections-command}
4084 @dots{}
4085 @}
4086 @end smallexample
4087
4088 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4089
4090 @itemize @bullet
4091 @item
4092 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4093 @item
4094 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4095 @item
4096 an output section description
4097 @item
4098 an overlay description
4099 @end itemize
4100
4101 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4102 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4103 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4104 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4105 the layout of the output file.
4106
4107 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4108 below.
4109
4110 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4111 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4112 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4113 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4114 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4115 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4116
4117 @menu
4118 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4119 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4120 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4121 * Input Section:: Input section description
4122 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4123 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4124 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4125 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4126 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4127 @end menu
4128
4129 @node Output Section Description
4130 @subsection Output Section Description
4131 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4132 @smallexample
4133 @group
4134 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4135 [AT(@var{lma})]
4136 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4137 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4138 [@var{constraint}]
4139 @{
4140 @var{output-section-command}
4141 @var{output-section-command}
4142 @dots{}
4143 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4144 @end group
4145 @end smallexample
4146
4147 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4148
4149 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4150 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4151 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4152 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4153 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4154
4155 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4156
4157 @itemize @bullet
4158 @item
4159 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4160 @item
4161 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4162 @item
4163 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4164 @item
4165 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4166 @end itemize
4167
4168 @node Output Section Name
4169 @subsection Output Section Name
4170 @cindex name, section
4171 @cindex section name
4172 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4173 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4174 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4175 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4176 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4177 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4178 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4179 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4180 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4181 commas must be quoted.
4182
4183 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4184 Discarding}.
4185
4186 @node Output Section Address
4187 @subsection Output Section Address
4188 @cindex address, section
4189 @cindex section address
4190 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4191 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4192 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4193
4194 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4195 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4196 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4197 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4198 contained within the output section.
4199
4200 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4201
4202 @itemize @bullet
4203 @item
4204 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4205 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4206 in that region.
4207
4208 @item
4209 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4210 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4211 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4212 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4213
4214 @item
4215 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4216 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4217 counter.
4218 @end itemize
4219
4220 @noindent
4221 For example:
4222
4223 @smallexample
4224 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4225 @end smallexample
4226
4227 @noindent
4228 and
4229
4230 @smallexample
4231 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4232 @end smallexample
4233
4234 @noindent
4235 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4236 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4237 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4238 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4239 input sections.
4240
4241 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4242 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4243 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4244 do something like this:
4245 @smallexample
4246 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4247 @end smallexample
4248 @noindent
4249 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4250 aligned upward to the specified value.
4251
4252 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4253 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4254 sections are ignored).
4255
4256 @node Input Section
4257 @subsection Input Section Description
4258 @cindex input sections
4259 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4260 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4261
4262 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4263 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4264 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4265 map the input files into your memory layout.
4266
4267 @menu
4268 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4269 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4270 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4271 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4272 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4273 @end menu
4274
4275 @node Input Section Basics
4276 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4277 @cindex input section basics
4278 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4279 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4280
4281 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4282 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4283
4284 The most common input section description is to include all input
4285 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4286 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4287 @smallexample
4288 *(.text)
4289 @end smallexample
4290 @noindent
4291 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4292 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4293 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4294 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4295 example:
4296 @smallexample
4297 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4298 @end smallexample
4299 @noindent
4300 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4301 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4302 placed inside the section list, for example:
4303 @smallexample
4304 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4305 @end smallexample
4306 @noindent
4307 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4308 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4309 more than one section, as described below.
4310
4311 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4312 @smallexample
4313 *(.text .rdata)
4314 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4315 @end smallexample
4316 @noindent
4317 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4318 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4319 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4320 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4321 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4322 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4323
4324 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4325 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4326 immediately following section, for example:
4327 @smallexample
4328 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4329 @end smallexample
4330 @noindent
4331 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4332 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4333 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4334 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4335 could be modified to:
4336 @smallexample
4337 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4338 @end smallexample
4339 @noindent
4340 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4341 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4342 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4343 @smallexample
4344 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4345 @end smallexample
4346
4347 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4348 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4349 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4350 @smallexample
4351 data.o(.data)
4352 @end smallexample
4353
4354 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4355 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4356
4357 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4358
4359 @smallexample
4360 @group
4361 SECTIONS @{
4362 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4363 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4364 @}
4365 @end group
4366 @end smallexample
4367
4368 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4369 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4370 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4371 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4372 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4373
4374 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4375 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4376 with no whitespace around the colon.
4377
4378 @table @samp
4379 @item archive:file
4380 matches file within archive
4381 @item archive:
4382 matches the whole archive
4383 @item :file
4384 matches file but not one in an archive
4385 @end table
4386
4387 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4388 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4389 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4390 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4391 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4392 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4393 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4394 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4395 command.
4396
4397 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4398 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4399 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4400 @smallexample
4401 data.o
4402 @end smallexample
4403
4404 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4405 and does not contain any wild card
4406 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4407 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4408 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4409 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4410 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4411 the archive search path.
4412
4413 @node Input Section Wildcards
4414 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4415 @cindex input section wildcards
4416 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4417 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4418 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4419 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4420 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4421
4422 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4423 pattern for the file name.
4424
4425 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4426
4427 @table @samp
4428 @item *
4429 matches any number of characters
4430 @item ?
4431 matches any single character
4432 @item [@var{chars}]
4433 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4434 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4435 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4436 @item \
4437 quotes the following character
4438 @end table
4439
4440 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4441 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4442 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4443 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4444 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4445 a @samp{/} character.
4446
4447 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4448 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4449 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4450
4451 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4452 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4453 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4454 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4455 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4456 @smallexample
4457 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4458 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4459 @end smallexample
4460
4461 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4462 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4463 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4464 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4465 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4466 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4467 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4468
4469 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4470 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4471 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4472 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4473 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4474 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4475
4476 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4477 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4478 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4479 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4480 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4481
4482 @cindex SORT
4483 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4484
4485 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4486 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4487
4488 @enumerate
4489 @item
4490 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4491 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4492 sections have the same name.
4493 @item
4494 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4495 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4496 sections have the same alignment.
4497 @item
4498 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4499 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4500 @item
4501 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4502 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4503 @item
4504 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4505 @end enumerate
4506
4507 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4508 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4509 takes precedence over the command line option.
4510
4511 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4512 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4513 treated as nested sorting command.
4514
4515 @enumerate
4516 @item
4517 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4518 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4519 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4520 @item
4521 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4522 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4523 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4524 @end enumerate
4525
4526 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4527 command line option will be ignored.
4528
4529 @cindex SORT_NONE
4530 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4531 section sorting option.
4532
4533 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4534 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4535 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4536
4537 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4538 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4539 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4540 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4541 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4542 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4543 @smallexample
4544 @group
4545 SECTIONS @{
4546 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4547 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4548 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4549 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4550 @}
4551 @end group
4552 @end smallexample
4553
4554 @node Input Section Common
4555 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4556 @cindex common symbol placement
4557 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4558 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4559 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4560 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4561 named @samp{COMMON}.
4562
4563 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4564 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4565 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4566 input files are placed in another section.
4567
4568 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4569 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4570 @smallexample
4571 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4572 @end smallexample
4573
4574 @cindex scommon section
4575 @cindex small common symbols
4576 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4577 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4578 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4579 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4580 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4581 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4582 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4583 locations.
4584
4585 @cindex [COMMON]
4586 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4587 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4588 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4589
4590 @node Input Section Keep
4591 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4592 @cindex KEEP
4593 @cindex garbage collection
4594 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4595 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4596 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4597 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4598 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4599
4600 @node Input Section Example
4601 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4602 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4603 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4604 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4605 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4606 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4607 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4608 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4609 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4610 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4611
4612 @smallexample
4613 @group
4614 SECTIONS @{
4615 outputa 0x10000 :
4616 @{
4617 all.o
4618 foo.o (.input1)
4619 @}
4620 @end group
4621 @group
4622 outputb :
4623 @{
4624 foo.o (.input2)
4625 foo1.o (.input1)
4626 @}
4627 @end group
4628 @group
4629 outputc :
4630 @{
4631 *(.input1)
4632 *(.input2)
4633 @}
4634 @}
4635 @end group
4636 @end smallexample
4637
4638 @node Output Section Data
4639 @subsection Output Section Data
4640 @cindex data
4641 @cindex section data
4642 @cindex output section data
4643 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4644 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4645 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4646 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4647 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4648 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4649 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4650 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4651 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4652 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4653 counter.
4654
4655 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4656 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4657 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4658 stored.
4659
4660 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4661 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4662 @smallexample
4663 BYTE(1)
4664 LONG(addr)
4665 @end smallexample
4666
4667 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4668 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4669 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4670 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4671 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4672
4673 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4674 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4675 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4676 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4677 endianness of the first input object file.
4678
4679 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4680 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4681 @smallexample
4682 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4683 @end smallexample
4684 whereas this will work:
4685 @smallexample
4686 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4687 @end smallexample
4688
4689 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4690 @cindex holes, filling
4691 @cindex unspecified memory
4692 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4693 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4694 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4695 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4696 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4697 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4698 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4699 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4700 different parts of an output section.
4701
4702 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4703 value @samp{0x90}:
4704 @smallexample
4705 FILL(0x90909090)
4706 @end smallexample
4707
4708 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4709 section attribute, but it only affects the
4710 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4711 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4712 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4713 expression.
4714
4715 @node Output Section Keywords
4716 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4717 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4718 commands.
4719
4720 @table @code
4721 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4722 @cindex input filename symbols
4723 @cindex filename symbols
4724 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4725 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4726 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4727 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4728 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4729
4730 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4731 normally used for any other object file format.
4732
4733 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4734 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4735 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4736 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4737 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4738 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4739 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4740 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4741 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4742 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4743 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4744 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4745 ignored for other object file formats.
4746
4747 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4748 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4749 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4750 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4751 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4752 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4753 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4754 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4755 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4756 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4757 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4758 @code{exit}.
4759
4760 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4761 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4762 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4763 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4764 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4765 runtime code expects to see.
4766
4767 @smallexample
4768 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4769 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4770 *(.ctors)
4771 LONG(0)
4772 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4773 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4774 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4775 *(.dtors)
4776 LONG(0)
4777 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4778 @end smallexample
4779
4780 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4781 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4782 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4783 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4784 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4785 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4786 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4787 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4788
4789 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4790 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4791 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4792 scripts.
4793
4794 @end table
4795
4796 @node Output Section Discarding
4797 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4798 @cindex discarding sections
4799 @cindex sections, discarding
4800 @cindex removing sections
4801 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4802 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4803 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4804 @smallexample
4805 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4806 @end smallexample
4807 @noindent
4808 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4809 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4810 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4811 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4812 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4813 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4814 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4815 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4816 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4817
4818 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4819 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4820 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4821 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4822 section is discarded.
4823
4824 @cindex /DISCARD/
4825 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4826 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4827 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4828
4829 @node Output Section Attributes
4830 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4831 @cindex output section attributes
4832 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4833 like this:
4834
4835 @smallexample
4836 @group
4837 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4838 [AT(@var{lma})]
4839 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4840 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4841 [@var{constraint}]
4842 @{
4843 @var{output-section-command}
4844 @var{output-section-command}
4845 @dots{}
4846 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4847 @end group
4848 @end smallexample
4849
4850 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4851 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4852 remaining section attributes.
4853
4854 @menu
4855 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4856 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4857 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4858 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4859 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4860 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4861 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4862 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4863 @end menu
4864
4865 @node Output Section Type
4866 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4867 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4868 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4869
4870 @table @code
4871 @item NOLOAD
4872 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4873 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4874 @item DSECT
4875 @itemx COPY
4876 @itemx INFO
4877 @itemx OVERLAY
4878 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4879 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4880 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4881 section when the program is run.
4882 @end table
4883
4884 @kindex NOLOAD
4885 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4886 @cindex loading, preventing
4887 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4888 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4889 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4890 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4891 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4892 @smallexample
4893 @group
4894 SECTIONS @{
4895 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4896 @dots{}
4897 @}
4898 @end group
4899 @end smallexample
4900
4901 @node Output Section LMA
4902 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4903 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4904 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4905 @cindex load address
4906 @cindex section load address
4907 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4908 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4909 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4910 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4911 address is optional.
4912
4913 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4914 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4915 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4916 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4917 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4918
4919 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4920 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4921 load address:
4922
4923 @itemize @bullet
4924 @item
4925 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4926 the LMA address as well.
4927
4928 @item
4929 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4930
4931 @item
4932 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4933 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4934 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4935 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4936 the last section in the located region.
4937
4938 @item
4939 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4940 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4941
4942 @item
4943 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4944 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4945 @end itemize
4946
4947 @cindex ROM initialized data
4948 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4949 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4950 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4951 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4952 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4953 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4954 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4955 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4956 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4957
4958 @smallexample
4959 @group
4960 SECTIONS
4961 @{
4962 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4963 .mdata 0x2000 :
4964 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4965 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4966 .bss 0x3000 :
4967 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4968 @}
4969 @end group
4970 @end smallexample
4971
4972 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4973 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4974 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4975 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4976 script.
4977
4978 @smallexample
4979 @group
4980 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4981 char *src = &_etext;
4982 char *dst = &_data;
4983
4984 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4985 while (dst < &_edata)
4986 *dst++ = *src++;
4987
4988 /* Zero bss. */
4989 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4990 *dst = 0;
4991 @end group
4992 @end smallexample
4993
4994 @node Forced Output Alignment
4995 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4996 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4997 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4998 @cindex output section alignment
4999 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5000 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5001 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5002
5003 @node Forced Input Alignment
5004 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5005 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5006 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5007 @cindex input section alignment
5008 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5009 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5010 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5011
5012 @node Output Section Constraint
5013 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5014 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5015 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5016 @cindex constraints on output sections
5017 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5018 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5019 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5020 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5021
5022 @node Output Section Region
5023 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5024 @kindex >@var{region}
5025 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5026 @cindex memory regions and sections
5027 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5028 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5029
5030 Here is a simple example:
5031 @smallexample
5032 @group
5033 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5034 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5035 @end group
5036 @end smallexample
5037
5038 @node Output Section Phdr
5039 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5040 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5041 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5042 @cindex program headers and sections
5043 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5044 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5045 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5046 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5047 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5048 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5049
5050 Here is a simple example:
5051 @smallexample
5052 @group
5053 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5054 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5055 @end group
5056 @end smallexample
5057
5058 @node Output Section Fill
5059 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5060 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5061 @cindex section fill pattern
5062 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5063 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5064 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5065 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5066 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5067 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5068 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5069 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5070 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5071 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5072 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5073 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5074 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5075
5076 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5077 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5078
5079 Here is a simple example:
5080 @smallexample
5081 @group
5082 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5083 @end group
5084 @end smallexample
5085
5086 @node Overlay Description
5087 @subsection Overlay Description
5088 @kindex OVERLAY
5089 @cindex overlays
5090 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5091 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5092 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5093 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5094 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5095 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5096 than another.
5097
5098 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5099 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5100 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5101 command is as follows:
5102 @smallexample
5103 @group
5104 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5105 @{
5106 @var{secname1}
5107 @{
5108 @var{output-section-command}
5109 @var{output-section-command}
5110 @dots{}
5111 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5112 @var{secname2}
5113 @{
5114 @var{output-section-command}
5115 @var{output-section-command}
5116 @dots{}
5117 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5118 @dots{}
5119 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5120 @end group
5121 @end smallexample
5122
5123 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5124 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5125 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5126 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5127 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5128 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5129
5130 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5131 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5132
5133 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5134 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5135 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5136 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5137 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5138 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5139
5140 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5141 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5142 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5143 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5144 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5145
5146 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5147 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5148 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5149 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5150 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5151 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5152 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5153
5154 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5155 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5156
5157 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5158 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5159 @smallexample
5160 @group
5161 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5162 @{
5163 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5164 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5165 @}
5166 @end group
5167 @end smallexample
5168 @noindent
5169 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5170 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5171 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5172 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5173 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5174 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5175
5176 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5177 like the following.
5178
5179 @smallexample
5180 @group
5181 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5182 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5183 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5184 @end group
5185 @end smallexample
5186
5187 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5188 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5189 example could have been written identically as follows.
5190
5191 @smallexample
5192 @group
5193 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5194 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5195 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5196 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5197 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5198 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5199 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5200 @end group
5201 @end smallexample
5202
5203 @node MEMORY
5204 @section MEMORY Command
5205 @kindex MEMORY
5206 @cindex memory regions
5207 @cindex regions of memory
5208 @cindex allocating memory
5209 @cindex discontinuous memory
5210 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5211 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5212
5213 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5214 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5215 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5216 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5217 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5218 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5219 around to fit into the available regions.
5220
5221 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5222 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5223 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5224 @code{MEMORY} is:
5225 @smallexample
5226 @group
5227 MEMORY
5228 @{
5229 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5230 @dots{}
5231 @}
5232 @end group
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5236 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5237 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5238 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5239 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5240 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5241 command.
5242
5243 @cindex memory region attributes
5244 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5245 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5246 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5247 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5248 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5249 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5250 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5251
5252 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5253 @table @samp
5254 @item R
5255 Read-only section
5256 @item W
5257 Read/write section
5258 @item X
5259 Executable section
5260 @item A
5261 Allocatable section
5262 @item I
5263 Initialized section
5264 @item L
5265 Same as @samp{I}
5266 @item !
5267 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5268 @end table
5269
5270 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5271 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5272 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5273 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5274 attributes.
5275
5276 @kindex ORIGIN =
5277 @kindex o =
5278 @kindex org =
5279 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5280 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5281 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5282 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5283 @code{ORG}).
5284
5285 @kindex LENGTH =
5286 @kindex len =
5287 @kindex l =
5288 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5289 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5290 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5291 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5292
5293 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5294 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5295 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5296 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5297 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5298 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5299 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5300 region.
5301
5302 @smallexample
5303 @group
5304 MEMORY
5305 @{
5306 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5307 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5308 @}
5309 @end group
5310 @end smallexample
5311
5312 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5313 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5314 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5315 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5316 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5317 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5318 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5319 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5320 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5321
5322 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5323 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5324 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5325
5326 @smallexample
5327 @group
5328 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5329 @end group
5330 @end smallexample
5331
5332 @node PHDRS
5333 @section PHDRS Command
5334 @kindex PHDRS
5335 @cindex program headers
5336 @cindex ELF program headers
5337 @cindex program segments
5338 @cindex segments, ELF
5339 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5340 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5341 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5342 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5343
5344 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5345 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5346 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5347 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5348 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5349
5350 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5351 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5352 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5353 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5354 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5355
5356 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5357 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5358 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5359
5360 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5361 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5362
5363 @smallexample
5364 @group
5365 PHDRS
5366 @{
5367 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5368 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5369 @}
5370 @end group
5371 @end smallexample
5372
5373 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5374 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5375 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5376 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5377 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5378 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5379
5380 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5381 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5382 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5383 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5384 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5385 Section Phdr}.
5386
5387 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5388 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5389 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5390 contain the section.
5391
5392 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5393 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5394 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5395 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5396 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5397 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5398 segment at all.
5399
5400 @kindex FILEHDR
5401 @kindex PHDRS
5402 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5403 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5404 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5405 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5406 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5407 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5408 these keywords.
5409
5410 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5411 value of the keyword.
5412
5413 @table @asis
5414 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5415 Indicates an unused program header.
5416
5417 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5418 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5419 the file.
5420
5421 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5422 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5423
5424 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5425 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5426 found.
5427
5428 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5429 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5430
5431 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5432 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5433 ABI.
5434
5435 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5436 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5437
5438 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5439 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5440
5441 @item @var{expression}
5442 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5443 be used for types not defined above.
5444 @end table
5445
5446 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5447 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5448 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5449 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5450 output section attribute.
5451
5452 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5453 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5454 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5455 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5456 header.
5457
5458 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5459 headers used on a native ELF system.
5460
5461 @example
5462 @group
5463 PHDRS
5464 @{
5465 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5466 interp PT_INTERP ;
5467 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5468 data PT_LOAD ;
5469 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5470 @}
5471
5472 SECTIONS
5473 @{
5474 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5475 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5476 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5477 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5478 @dots{}
5479 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5480 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5481 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5482 @dots{}
5483 @}
5484 @end group
5485 @end example
5486
5487 @node VERSION
5488 @section VERSION Command
5489 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5490 @cindex symbol versions
5491 @cindex version script
5492 @cindex versions of symbols
5493 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5494 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5495 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5496 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5497 shared library.
5498
5499 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5500 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5501 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5502
5503 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5504 @smallexample
5505 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5506 @end smallexample
5507
5508 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5509 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5510 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5511 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5512 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5513 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5514 library.
5515
5516 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5517 examples.
5518
5519 @smallexample
5520 VERS_1.1 @{
5521 global:
5522 foo1;
5523 local:
5524 old*;
5525 original*;
5526 new*;
5527 @};
5528
5529 VERS_1.2 @{
5530 foo2;
5531 @} VERS_1.1;
5532
5533 VERS_2.0 @{
5534 bar1; bar2;
5535 extern "C++" @{
5536 ns::*;
5537 "f(int, double)";
5538 @};
5539 @} VERS_1.2;
5540 @end smallexample
5541
5542 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5543 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5544 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5545 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5546 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5547 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5548 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5549 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5550 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5551 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5552
5553 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5554 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5555 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5556
5557 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5558 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5559 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5560
5561 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5562 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5563 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5564 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5565 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5566 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5567 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5568 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5569 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5570
5571 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5572 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5573 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5574 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5575
5576 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5577 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5578 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5579 won't.
5580
5581 @smallexample
5582 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5583 @end smallexample
5584
5585 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5586 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5587 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5588 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5589 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5590 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5591 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5592 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5593 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5594 search for each symbol reference.
5595
5596 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5597 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5598 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5599 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5600 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5601 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5602 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5603 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5604 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5605
5606 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5607 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5608 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5609 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5610 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5611 @smallexample
5612 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5613 @end smallexample
5614 @noindent
5615 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5616 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5617 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5618 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5619 takes precedence over a version script.
5620
5621 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5622 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5623 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5624 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5625 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5626
5627 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5628 source file. Here is an example:
5629
5630 @smallexample
5631 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5632 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5633 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5634 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5635 @end smallexample
5636
5637 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5638 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5639 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5640 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5641
5642 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5643 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5644 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5645 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5646 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5647 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5648
5649 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5650 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5651 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5652 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5653
5654 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5655
5656 @smallexample
5657 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5658 @end smallexample
5659
5660 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5661 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5662 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5663 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5664 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5665
5666 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5667 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5668 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5669 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5670 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5671 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5672 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5673 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5674 expect when you upgrade.
5675
5676 @node Expressions
5677 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5678 @cindex expressions
5679 @cindex arithmetic
5680 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5681 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5682 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5683 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5684
5685 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5686
5687 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5688 expressions.
5689
5690 @menu
5691 * Constants:: Constants
5692 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5693 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5694 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5695 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5696 * Operators:: Operators
5697 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5698 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5699 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5700 @end menu
5701
5702 @node Constants
5703 @subsection Constants
5704 @cindex integer notation
5705 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5706 All constants are integers.
5707
5708 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5709 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5710 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5711 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5712 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5713 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5714
5715 @cindex scaled integers
5716 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5717 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5718 @cindex suffixes for integers
5719 @cindex integer suffixes
5720 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5721 constant by
5722 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5723 @ifnottex
5724 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5725 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5726 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5727 @end ifnottex
5728 @tex
5729 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5730 @end tex
5731 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5732 respectively. For example, the following
5733 all refer to the same quantity:
5734
5735 @smallexample
5736 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5737 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5738 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5739 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5740 @end smallexample
5741
5742 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5743 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5744
5745 @node Symbolic Constants
5746 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5747 @cindex symbolic constants
5748 @kindex CONSTANT
5749 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5750 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5751
5752 @table @code
5753 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5754 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5755 The target's maximum page size.
5756
5757 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5758 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5759 The target's default page size.
5760 @end table
5761
5762 So for example:
5763
5764 @smallexample
5765 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5766 @end smallexample
5767
5768 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5769 supported by the target.
5770
5771 @node Symbols
5772 @subsection Symbol Names
5773 @cindex symbol names
5774 @cindex names
5775 @cindex quoted symbol names
5776 @kindex "
5777 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5778 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5779 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5780 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5781 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5782 @smallexample
5783 "SECTION" = 9;
5784 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5785 @end smallexample
5786
5787 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5788 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5789 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5790
5791 @node Orphan Sections
5792 @subsection Orphan Sections
5793 @cindex orphan
5794 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5795 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5796 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5797 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5798 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5799
5800 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5801 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5802 placed at the end of that output section.
5803
5804 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5805 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5806 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5807 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5808 one new output section.
5809
5810 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5811 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5812 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5813 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5814 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5815 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5816 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5817
5818 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5819 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5820 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5821
5822 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5823 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5824 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5825 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5826 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5827 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5828 character.
5829
5830 @node Location Counter
5831 @subsection The Location Counter
5832 @kindex .
5833 @cindex dot
5834 @cindex location counter
5835 @cindex current output location
5836 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5837 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5838 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5839 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5840 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5841
5842 @cindex holes
5843 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5844 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5845 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5846 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5847 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5848
5849 @smallexample
5850 SECTIONS
5851 @{
5852 output :
5853 @{
5854 file1(.text)
5855 . = . + 1000;
5856 file2(.text)
5857 . += 1000;
5858 file3(.text)
5859 @} = 0x12345678;
5860 @}
5861 @end smallexample
5862 @noindent
5863 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5864 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5865 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5866 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5867 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5868 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5869
5870 @cindex dot inside sections
5871 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5872 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5873 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5874 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5875 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5876 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5877
5878 @smallexample
5879 SECTIONS
5880 @{
5881 . = 0x100
5882 .text: @{
5883 *(.text)
5884 . = 0x200
5885 @}
5886 . = 0x500
5887 .data: @{
5888 *(.data)
5889 . += 0x600
5890 @}
5891 @}
5892 @end smallexample
5893
5894 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5895 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5896 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5897 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5898 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5899 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5900 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5901 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5902
5903 @cindex dot outside sections
5904 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5905 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5906 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5907
5908 @smallexample
5909 SECTIONS
5910 @{
5911 start_of_text = . ;
5912 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5913 end_of_text = . ;
5914
5915 start_of_data = . ;
5916 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5917 end_of_data = . ;
5918 @}
5919 @end smallexample
5920
5921 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5922 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5923 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5924 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5925 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5926 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5927 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5928 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5929 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5930 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5931 as follows:
5932
5933 @smallexample
5934 SECTIONS
5935 @{
5936 start_of_text = . ;
5937 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5938 end_of_text = . ;
5939
5940 start_of_data = . ;
5941 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5942 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5943 end_of_data = . ;
5944 @}
5945 @end smallexample
5946
5947 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5948 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5949 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5950 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5951 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5952 section. So you could write:
5953
5954 @smallexample
5955 SECTIONS
5956 @{
5957 start_of_text = . ;
5958 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5959 end_of_text = . ;
5960
5961 . = . ;
5962 start_of_data = . ;
5963 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5964 end_of_data = . ;
5965 @}
5966 @end smallexample
5967
5968 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5969 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5970
5971 @need 2000
5972 @node Operators
5973 @subsection Operators
5974 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5975 @cindex arithmetic operators
5976 @cindex precedence in expressions
5977 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5978 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5979 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5980 @ifnottex
5981 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5982 @smallexample
5983 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5984 (highest)
5985 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5986 2 left * / %
5987 3 left + -
5988 4 left >> <<
5989 5 left == != > < <= >=
5990 6 left &
5991 7 left |
5992 8 left &&
5993 9 left ||
5994 10 right ? :
5995 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5996 (lowest)
5997 @end smallexample
5998 Notes:
5999 (1) Prefix operators
6000 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6001 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6002 @end ifnottex
6003 @tex
6004 \vskip \baselineskip
6005 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6006 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6007 \hrule
6008 \halign
6009 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6010 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6011 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6012 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6013 \noalign{\hrule}
6014 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6015 &highest&&&&&\cr
6016 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6017 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6018 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6019 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6020 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6021 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6022 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6023 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6024 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6025 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6026 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6027 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6028 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6029 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6030 \hrule}
6031 @end tex
6032 @iftex
6033 {
6034 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6035 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6036 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6037 }
6038 @end iftex
6039 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6040
6041 @node Evaluation
6042 @subsection Evaluation
6043 @cindex lazy evaluation
6044 @cindex expression evaluation order
6045 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6046 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6047
6048 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6049 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6050 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6051 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6052
6053 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6054 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6055 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6056 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6057
6058 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6059 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6060 allocation.
6061
6062 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6063 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6064
6065 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6066 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6067 following
6068 @smallexample
6069 @group
6070 SECTIONS
6071 @{
6072 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6073 @{ *(.text) @}
6074 @}
6075 @end group
6076 @end smallexample
6077 @noindent
6078 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6079 address}.
6080
6081 @node Expression Section
6082 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6083 @cindex expression sections
6084 @cindex absolute expressions
6085 @cindex relative expressions
6086 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6087 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6088 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6089 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6090 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6091 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6092 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6093 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6094 operations.
6095
6096 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6097 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6098 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6099 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6100 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6101 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6102 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6103 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6104 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6105 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6106 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6107 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6108 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6109 everywhere.
6110
6111 In the following simple example,
6112
6113 @smallexample
6114 @group
6115 SECTIONS
6116 @{
6117 . = 0x100;
6118 __executable_start = 0x100;
6119 .data :
6120 @{
6121 . = 0x10;
6122 __data_start = 0x10;
6123 *(.data)
6124 @}
6125 @dots{}
6126 @}
6127 @end group
6128 @end smallexample
6129
6130 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6131 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6132 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6133 section in the second two assignments.
6134
6135 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6136 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6137
6138 @itemize @bullet
6139 @item
6140 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6141 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6142 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6143 @item
6144 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6145 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6146 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6147 @item
6148 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6149 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6150 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6151 before applying the operator.
6152 @end itemize
6153
6154 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6155
6156 @itemize @bullet
6157 @item
6158 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6159 @item
6160 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6161 @item
6162 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6163 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6164 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6165 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6166 but an absolute address otherwise.
6167 @item
6168 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6169 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6170 section as the relative operand(s).
6171 @item
6172 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6173 conversions) is an absolute address.
6174 @end itemize
6175
6176 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6177 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6178 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6179 section @samp{.data}:
6180 @smallexample
6181 SECTIONS
6182 @{
6183 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6184 @}
6185 @end smallexample
6186 @noindent
6187 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6188 @samp{.data} section.
6189
6190 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6191 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6192
6193 @node Builtin Functions
6194 @subsection Builtin Functions
6195 @cindex functions in expressions
6196 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6197 use in linker script expressions.
6198
6199 @table @code
6200 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6201 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6202 @cindex expression, absolute
6203 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6204 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6205 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6206 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6207
6208 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6209 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6210 @cindex section address in expression
6211 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6212 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6213 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6214 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6215 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6216 the other two will be absolute:
6217 @smallexample
6218 @group
6219 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6220 .output1 :
6221 @{
6222 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6223 @dots{}
6224 @}
6225 .output :
6226 @{
6227 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6228 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6229 @}
6230 @dots{} @}
6231 @end group
6232 @end smallexample
6233
6234 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6235 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6236 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6237 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6238 @cindex round up location counter
6239 @cindex align location counter
6240 @cindex round up expression
6241 @cindex align expression
6242 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6243 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6244 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6245 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6246 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6247 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6248
6249 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6250 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6251 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6252 input sections:
6253 @smallexample
6254 @group
6255 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6257 *(.data)
6258 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6259 @}
6260 @dots{} @}
6261 @end group
6262 @end smallexample
6263 @noindent
6264 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6265 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6266 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6267 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6268
6269 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6270
6271 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6272 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6273 @cindex section alignment
6274 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6275 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6276 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6277 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6278 value in that section.
6279 @smallexample
6280 @group
6281 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6282 .output @{
6283 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6284 @dots{}
6285 @}
6286 @dots{} @}
6287 @end group
6288 @end smallexample
6289
6290 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6291 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6292 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6293 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6294 section.
6295
6296 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6297 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6298 This is equivalent to either
6299 @smallexample
6300 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6301 @end smallexample
6302 or
6303 @smallexample
6304 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6305 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6306 @end smallexample
6307 @noindent
6308 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6309 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6310 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6311 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6312 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6313 bytes in the on-disk file.
6314
6315 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6316 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6317 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6318 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6319 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6320
6321 @noindent
6322 Example:
6323 @smallexample
6324 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6325 @end smallexample
6326
6327 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6328 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6329 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6330 evaluation purposes.
6331
6332 @smallexample
6333 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6334 @end smallexample
6335
6336 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6337 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6338 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6339 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6340 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6341 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6342 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6343 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6344 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6345 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6346 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6347 section alignment.
6348
6349 @smallexample
6350 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6351 @end smallexample
6352
6353 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6354 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6355 @cindex symbol defaults
6356 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6357 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6358 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6359 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6360 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6361 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6362 existed, its value is preserved:
6363
6364 @smallexample
6365 @group
6366 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6367 .text : @{
6368 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6369 @dots{}
6370 @}
6371 @dots{}
6372 @}
6373 @end group
6374 @end smallexample
6375
6376 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6377 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6378 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6379
6380 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6381 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6382 @cindex section load address in expression
6383 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6384 Section LMA}).
6385
6386 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6387 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6388 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6389 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6390
6391 @kindex MAX
6392 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6393 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6394
6395 @kindex MIN
6396 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6397 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6398
6399 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6400 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6401 @cindex unallocated address, next
6402 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6403 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6404 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6405 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6406
6407 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6408 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6409 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6410
6411 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6412 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6413 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6414 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6415 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6416 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6417 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6418 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6419 name.
6420
6421 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6422 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6423 @cindex section size
6424 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6425 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6426 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6427 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6428 @smallexample
6429 @group
6430 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6431 .output @{
6432 .start = . ;
6433 @dots{}
6434 .end = . ;
6435 @}
6436 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6437 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6438 @dots{} @}
6439 @end group
6440 @end smallexample
6441
6442 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6443 @itemx sizeof_headers
6444 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6445 @cindex header size
6446 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6447 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6448 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6449 choose, to facilitate paging.
6450
6451 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6452 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6453 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6454 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6455 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6456 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6457 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6458 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6459 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6460 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6461 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6462 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6463 @end table
6464
6465 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6466 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6467 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6468 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6469 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6470 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6471 linker will report an error.
6472
6473 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6474
6475 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6476 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6477 commands.
6478
6479 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6480 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6481 read. This can affect archive searching.
6482
6483 @ifset GENERIC
6484 @node Machine Dependent
6485 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6486
6487 @cindex machine dependencies
6488 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6489 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6490 functionality are not listed.
6491
6492 @menu
6493 @ifset H8300
6494 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6495 @end ifset
6496 @ifset I960
6497 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6498 @end ifset
6499 @ifset M68HC11
6500 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6501 @end ifset
6502 @ifset ARM
6503 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6504 @end ifset
6505 @ifset HPPA
6506 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6507 @end ifset
6508 @ifset M68K
6509 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6510 @end ifset
6511 @ifset MIPS
6512 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6513 @end ifset
6514 @ifset MMIX
6515 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6516 @end ifset
6517 @ifset MSP430
6518 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6519 @end ifset
6520 @ifset NDS32
6521 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6522 @end ifset
6523 @ifset NIOSII
6524 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6525 @end ifset
6526 @ifset POWERPC
6527 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6528 @end ifset
6529 @ifset POWERPC64
6530 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6531 @end ifset
6532 @ifset SPU
6533 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6534 @end ifset
6535 @ifset TICOFF
6536 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6537 @end ifset
6538 @ifset WIN32
6539 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6540 @end ifset
6541 @ifset XTENSA
6542 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6543 @end ifset
6544 @end menu
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @ifset H8300
6548 @ifclear GENERIC
6549 @raisesections
6550 @end ifclear
6551
6552 @node H8/300
6553 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6554
6555 @cindex H8/300 support
6556 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6557 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6558
6559 @table @emph
6560 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6561 @item relaxing address modes
6562 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6563 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6564 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6565 respectively.
6566
6567 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6568 @item synthesizing instructions
6569 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6570 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6571 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6572 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6573 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6574 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6575 top page of memory).
6576
6577 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6578 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6579 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6580 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6581 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6582 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6583 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6584
6585 @item bit manipulation instructions
6586 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6587 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6588 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6589 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6590 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6591 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6592 the top page of memory).
6593
6594 @item system control instructions
6595 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6596 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6597 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6598 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6599 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6600 the top page of memory).
6601 @end table
6602
6603 @ifclear GENERIC
6604 @lowersections
6605 @end ifclear
6606 @end ifset
6607
6608 @ifclear GENERIC
6609 @ifset Renesas
6610 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6611 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6612 @node Renesas
6613 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6614
6615 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6616 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6617 options are required for these chips.
6618 @end ifset
6619 @end ifclear
6620
6621 @ifset I960
6622 @ifclear GENERIC
6623 @raisesections
6624 @end ifclear
6625
6626 @node i960
6627 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6628
6629 @cindex i960 support
6630
6631 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6632 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6633 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6634 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6635 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6636 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6637 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6638
6639 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6640 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6641 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6642 the names
6643
6644 @smallexample
6645 @group
6646 try
6647 libtry.a
6648 tryca
6649 libtryca.a
6650 @end group
6651 @end smallexample
6652
6653 @noindent
6654 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6655 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6656
6657 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6658 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6659 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6660 specifies a library.
6661
6662 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6663 @cindex relaxing on i960
6664 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6665 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6666 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6667 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6668 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6669 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6670 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6671 not itself call any subroutines).
6672
6673 @ifclear GENERIC
6674 @lowersections
6675 @end ifclear
6676 @end ifset
6677
6678 @ifset ARM
6679 @ifclear GENERIC
6680 @raisesections
6681 @end ifclear
6682
6683 @ifset M68HC11
6684 @ifclear GENERIC
6685 @raisesections
6686 @end ifclear
6687
6688 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6689 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6690
6691 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6692
6693 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6694
6695 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6696 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6697
6698 @table @emph
6699 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6700 @item relaxing address modes
6701 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6702 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6703 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6704 respectively.
6705
6706 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6707 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6708 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6709
6710 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6711 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6712 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6713 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6714 @code{bset} instructions.
6715
6716 @end table
6717
6718 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6719
6720 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6721 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6722 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6723 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6724 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6725 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6726 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6727 point to the function trampoline.
6728
6729 @ifclear GENERIC
6730 @lowersections
6731 @end ifclear
6732 @end ifset
6733
6734 @node ARM
6735 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6736
6737 @cindex ARM interworking support
6738 @kindex --support-old-code
6739 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6740 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6741 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6742 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6743 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6744 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6745 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6746 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6747 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6748 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6749
6750 @cindex thumb entry point
6751 @cindex entry point, thumb
6752 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6753 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6754 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6755 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6756 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6757 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6758
6759 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6760 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6761 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6762 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6763 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6764 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6765
6766 @cindex BE8
6767 @kindex --be8
6768 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6769 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6770 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6771 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6772 little-endian code.
6773
6774 @cindex TARGET1
6775 @kindex --target1-rel
6776 @kindex --target1-abs
6777 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6778 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6779 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6780 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6781
6782 @cindex TARGET2
6783 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6784 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6785 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6786 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6787 @table @samp
6788 @item rel
6789 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6790 @item abs
6791 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6792 @item got-rel
6793 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6794 @end table
6795
6796 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6797 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6798 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6799 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6800 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6801 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6802
6803 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6804 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6805 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6806
6807 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6808 relocations are ignored.
6809
6810 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6811 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6812 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6813 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6814
6815 @smallexample
6816 TST rM, #1
6817 MOVEQ PC, rM
6818 BX Rn
6819 @end smallexample
6820
6821 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6822 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6823 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6824
6825 @cindex USE_BLX
6826 @kindex --use-blx
6827 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6828 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6829 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6830 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6831 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6832
6833 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6834 specify it if you are using that target.
6835
6836 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6837 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6838 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6839 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6840 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6841 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6842 the support code can read the intended values.
6843
6844 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6845 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6846 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6847 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6848 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6849 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6850
6851 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6852 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6853 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6854 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6855 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6856 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6857
6858 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6859 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6860 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6861 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6862 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6863 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6864 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6865
6866 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6867 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6868 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6869 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6870 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6871 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6872 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6873
6874 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6875 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6876 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6877
6878 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6879 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6880
6881 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6882 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6883 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6884 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6885 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6886 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6887 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6888 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6889
6890 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6891 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6892
6893 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6894 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6895 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6896 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6897 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6898
6899 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6900 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6901 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6902 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6903 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6904 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6905
6906 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6907 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6908
6909 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6910 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6911 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6912 occurs.
6913
6914 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6915 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6916 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6917 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6918 occurs.
6919
6920 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6921 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6922 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6923 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6924 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6925 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6926 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6927 not be diagnosed.
6928
6929 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6930 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6931 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6932 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6933 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6934 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6935 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6936
6937 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6938 @kindex --pic-veneer
6939 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6940 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6941 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6942 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6943
6944 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6945 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6946 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6947 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6948 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6949 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6950 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6951 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6952 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6953 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6954 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6955 where they should be placed.
6956
6957 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6958 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6959 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6960 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6961 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6962 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6963 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6964 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6965 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6966 from the input sections.
6967
6968 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6969 @samp{N = +1}.
6970
6971 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6972 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6973 otherwise.
6974
6975 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6976 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6977 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6978 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6979
6980 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6981
6982 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6983 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6984 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6985 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6986
6987 Please contact ARM for further details.
6988
6989 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6990 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6991 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6992 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6993
6994 @kindex --long-plt
6995 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6996 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6997 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6998 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6999
7000 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7001 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7002 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7003 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7004
7005 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7006 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7007 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7008 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7009 veneers in memory.
7010
7011 @kindex --cmse-implib
7012 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7013 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7014 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7015 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7016 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7017
7018 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7019 @cindex Input import library
7020 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7021 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7022 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7023 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7024 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7025 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7026 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7027 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7028 specified.
7029
7030 @ifclear GENERIC
7031 @lowersections
7032 @end ifclear
7033 @end ifset
7034
7035 @ifset HPPA
7036 @ifclear GENERIC
7037 @raisesections
7038 @end ifclear
7039
7040 @node HPPA ELF32
7041 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7042 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7043 @kindex --multi-subspace
7044 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7045 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7046 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7047 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7048 multiple sub-spaces.
7049
7050 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7051 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7052 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7053 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7054 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7055 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7056 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7057 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7058 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7059 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7060 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7061 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7062 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7063 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7064 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7065 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7066
7067 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7068 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7069 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7070 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7071
7072 @ifclear GENERIC
7073 @lowersections
7074 @end ifclear
7075 @end ifset
7076
7077 @ifset M68K
7078 @ifclear GENERIC
7079 @raisesections
7080 @end ifclear
7081
7082 @node M68K
7083 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7084
7085 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7086 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7087 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7088 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7089 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7090 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7091 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7092 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7093 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7094 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7095 support such GOTs.
7096 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7097 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7098 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7099 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7100
7101 @ifclear GENERIC
7102 @lowersections
7103 @end ifclear
7104 @end ifset
7105
7106 @ifset MIPS
7107 @ifclear GENERIC
7108 @raisesections
7109 @end ifclear
7110
7111 @node MIPS
7112 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7113
7114 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7115 @kindex --insn32
7116 @kindex --no-insn32
7117 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7118 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7119 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7120 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7121 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7122 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7123
7124 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7125 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7126 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7127 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7128 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7129 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7130 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7131 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7132 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7133 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7134 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7135 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7136
7137 @ifclear GENERIC
7138 @lowersections
7139 @end ifclear
7140 @end ifset
7141
7142 @ifset MMIX
7143 @ifclear GENERIC
7144 @raisesections
7145 @end ifclear
7146
7147 @node MMIX
7148 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7149 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7150 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7151 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7152 can translate between the two formats.
7153
7154 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7155 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7156 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7157 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7158 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7159 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7160 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7161 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7162
7163 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7164 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7165 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7166 of a section.
7167
7168 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7169 are left out from an mmo file.
7170
7171 @ifclear GENERIC
7172 @lowersections
7173 @end ifclear
7174 @end ifset
7175
7176 @ifset MSP430
7177 @ifclear GENERIC
7178 @raisesections
7179 @end ifclear
7180
7181 @node MSP430
7182 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7183 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7184 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7185 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7186
7187 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7188 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7189
7190 @table @code
7191 @item @samp{.vectors}
7192 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7193
7194 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7195 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7196 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7197
7198 @item @samp{.infomem}
7199 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7200 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7201
7202 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7203 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7204 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7205
7206 @item @samp{.noinit}
7207 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7208
7209 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7210 @end table
7211
7212 @ifclear GENERIC
7213 @lowersections
7214 @end ifclear
7215 @end ifset
7216
7217 @ifset NDS32
7218 @ifclear GENERIC
7219 @raisesections
7220 @end ifclear
7221
7222 @node NDS32
7223 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7224 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7225 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7226 relaxes objects according to these options.
7227
7228 @table @code
7229 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7230 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7231
7232 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7233 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7234
7235 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7236 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7237
7238 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7239 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7240
7241 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7242 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7243
7244 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7245 Update the existing EX9 table.
7246
7247 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7248 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7249
7250 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7251 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7252
7253 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7254 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7255
7256 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7257 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7258 @end table
7259
7260 @ifclear GENERIC
7261 @lowersections
7262 @end ifclear
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset NIOSII
7266 @ifclear GENERIC
7267 @raisesections
7268 @end ifclear
7269
7270 @node Nios II
7271 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7272 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7273 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7274
7275 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7276 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7277 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7278 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7279 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7280 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7281 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7282 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7283 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7284 larger than 256MB.
7285
7286 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7287 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7288 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7289 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7290 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7291 register as a temporary.
7292
7293 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7294 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7295 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7296
7297 @ifclear GENERIC
7298 @lowersections
7299 @end ifclear
7300 @end ifset
7301
7302 @ifset POWERPC
7303 @ifclear GENERIC
7304 @raisesections
7305 @end ifclear
7306
7307 @node PowerPC ELF32
7308 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7309 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7310 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7311 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7312 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7313 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7314 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7315 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7316 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7317 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7318 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7319 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7320 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7321
7322 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7323 @table @option
7324 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7325 @kindex --bss-plt
7326 @item --bss-plt
7327 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7328 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7329 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7330 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7331 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7332 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7333 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7334 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7335
7336 @kindex --secure-plt
7337 @item --secure-plt
7338 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7339 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7340 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7341 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7342 style BSS PLT.
7343
7344 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7345 @kindex --sdata-got
7346 @item --sdata-got
7347 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7348 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7349 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7350 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7351 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7352 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7353 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7354 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7355 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7356 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7357 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7358 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7359
7360 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7361 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7362 @item --emit-stub-syms
7363 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7364 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7365
7366 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7367 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7368 @item --no-tls-optimize
7369 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7370 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7371 disable the optimization.
7372 @end table
7373
7374 @ifclear GENERIC
7375 @lowersections
7376 @end ifclear
7377 @end ifset
7378
7379 @ifset POWERPC64
7380 @ifclear GENERIC
7381 @raisesections
7382 @end ifclear
7383
7384 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7385 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7386
7387 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7388 @table @option
7389 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7390 @kindex --stub-group-size
7391 @item --stub-group-size
7392 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7393 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7394 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7395 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7396 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7397 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7398 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7399 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7400 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7401 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7402 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7403 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7404 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7405 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7406
7407 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7408 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7409 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7410 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7411
7412 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7413 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7414 @item --emit-stub-syms
7415 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7416 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7417
7418 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7419 @kindex --dotsyms
7420 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7421 @item --dotsyms
7422 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7423 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7424 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7425 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7426 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7427 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7428 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7429 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7430 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7431 feature.
7432
7433 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7434 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7435 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7436 @item --save-restore-funcs
7437 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7438 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7439 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7440 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7441 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7442 link.
7443
7444 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7445 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7446 @item --no-tls-optimize
7447 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7448 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7449 disable the optimization.
7450
7451 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7452 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7453 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7454 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7455 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7456 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7457 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7458 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7459 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7460 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7461 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7462 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7463 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7464 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7465 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7466
7467 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7468 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7469 @item --no-opd-optimize
7470 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7471 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7472 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7473 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7474
7475 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7476 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7477 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7478 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7479 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7480 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7481 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7482
7483 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7484 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7485 @item --no-toc-optimize
7486 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7487 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7488 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7489 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7490 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7491 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7492 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7493 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7494 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7495 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7496 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7497 optimization.
7498
7499 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7500 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7501 @item --no-multi-toc
7502 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7503 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7504 where TOC
7505 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7506 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7507 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7508 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7509 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7510 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7511 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7512 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7513
7514 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7515 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7516 @item --no-toc-sort
7517 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7518 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7519 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7520 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7521 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7522 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7523 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7524 off this feature.
7525
7526 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7527 @kindex --plt-align
7528 @kindex --no-plt-align
7529 @item --plt-align
7530 @itemx --no-plt-align
7531 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7532 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7533 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7534 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7535 stubs are packed tightly.
7536
7537 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7538 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7539 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7540 @item --plt-static-chain
7541 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7542 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7543 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7544 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7545
7546 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7547 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7548 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7549 @item --plt-thread-safe
7550 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7551 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7552 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7553 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7554 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7555 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7556 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7557 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7558 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7559 default behaviour.
7560 @end table
7561
7562 @ifclear GENERIC
7563 @lowersections
7564 @end ifclear
7565 @end ifset
7566
7567 @ifset SPU
7568 @ifclear GENERIC
7569 @raisesections
7570 @end ifclear
7571
7572 @node SPU ELF
7573 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7574
7575 @cindex SPU ELF options
7576 @table @option
7577
7578 @cindex SPU plugins
7579 @kindex --plugin
7580 @item --plugin
7581 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7582
7583 @cindex SPU overlays
7584 @kindex --no-overlays
7585 @item --no-overlays
7586 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7587 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7588 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7589 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7590
7591 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7592 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7593 @item --emit-stub-syms
7594 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7595 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7596
7597 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7598 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7599 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7600 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7601 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7602 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7603
7604 @cindex SPU local store size
7605 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7606 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7607 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7608 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7609 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7610
7611 @cindex SPU
7612 @kindex --stack-analysis
7613 @item --stack-analysis
7614 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7615 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7616 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7617 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7618 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7619 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7620 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7621 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7622 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7623 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7624 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7625 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7626 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7627 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7628 and calls will be given.
7629
7630 @cindex SPU
7631 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7632 @item --emit-stack-syms
7633 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7634 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7635 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7636 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7637 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7638 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7639 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7640 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7641 @end table
7642
7643 @ifclear GENERIC
7644 @lowersections
7645 @end ifclear
7646 @end ifset
7647
7648 @ifset TICOFF
7649 @ifclear GENERIC
7650 @raisesections
7651 @end ifclear
7652
7653 @node TI COFF
7654 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7655 @cindex TI COFF versions
7656 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7657 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7658 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7659 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7660 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7661 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7662
7663 @ifclear GENERIC
7664 @lowersections
7665 @end ifclear
7666 @end ifset
7667
7668 @ifset WIN32
7669 @ifclear GENERIC
7670 @raisesections
7671 @end ifclear
7672
7673 @node WIN32
7674 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7675
7676 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7677 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7678 command line options mentioned here.
7679
7680 @table @emph
7681 @cindex import libraries
7682 @item import libraries
7683 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7684 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7685 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7686 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7687 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7688 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7689
7690 @item exporting DLL symbols
7691 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7692 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7693
7694 @table @emph
7695 @item using auto-export functionality
7696 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7697 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7698 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7699
7700 @itemize
7701 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7702 @item --exclude-symbols
7703 @item --exclude-libs
7704 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7705 @item --version-script
7706 @end itemize
7707
7708 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7709 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7710 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7711 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7712 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7713 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7714 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7715 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7716
7717 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7718 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7719 if either of the following are true:
7720
7721 @itemize
7722 @item A DEF file is used.
7723 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7724 @end itemize
7725
7726 @item using a DEF file
7727 @cindex using a DEF file
7728 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7729 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7730 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7731 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7732 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7733
7734 @example
7735 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7736 @end example
7737
7738 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7739 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7740
7741 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7742
7743 @example
7744 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7745
7746 EXPORTS
7747 foo
7748 bar
7749 _bar = bar
7750 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7751 var1 DATA
7752 doo = foo == foo2
7753 eoo DATA == var1
7754 @end example
7755
7756 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7757 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7758 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7759 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7760 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7761 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7762 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7763 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7764 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7765
7766 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7767 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7768 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7769
7770 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7771 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7772 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7773 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7774
7775 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7776 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7777 non-default base address for the image.
7778
7779 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7780 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7781 filename specified on the command line.
7782
7783 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7784
7785 @example
7786 EXPORTS
7787 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7788 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7789 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7790 @end example
7791
7792 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7793 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7794 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7795 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7796 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7797 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7798 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7799
7800 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7801
7802 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7803 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7804 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7805 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7806 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7807
7808 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7809 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7810 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7811 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7812
7813 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7814 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7815 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7816 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7817 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7818 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7819 application will behave unexpectedly.
7820
7821 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7822 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7823 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7824 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7825 the DLL without an import library.
7826
7827 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7828 other DEF file statements
7829
7830 @cindex creating a DEF file
7831 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7832 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7833
7834 @item Using decorations
7835 @cindex Using decorations
7836 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7837 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7838 declared as:
7839
7840 @example
7841 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7842 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7843 @end example
7844
7845 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7846 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7847 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7848 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7849
7850 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7851 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7852 instead:
7853
7854 @example
7855 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7856 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7857 @end example
7858
7859 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7860 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7861 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7862 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7863 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7864 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7865 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7866 information.
7867 @end table
7868
7869 @cindex automatic data imports
7870 @item automatic data imports
7871 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7872 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7873 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7874 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7875 code to these platforms, especially for large
7876 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7877 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7878 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7879 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7880 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7881 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7882 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7883 trigger the feature's use.
7884
7885 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7886 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7887
7888 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7889 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7890
7891 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7892 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7893 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7894 below.
7895
7896 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7897 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7898 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7899 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7900 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7901 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7902 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7903 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7904 references.
7905
7906 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7907 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7908 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7909 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7910 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7911 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7912 run without error on an older system.
7913
7914 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7915 enabled as needed.
7916
7917 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7918 @item direct linking to a dll
7919 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7920 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7921 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7922 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7923 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7924 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7925 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7926 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7927 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7928 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7929
7930 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7931 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7932 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7933 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7934 select the dll instead of an import library.
7935
7936
7937 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7938 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7939
7940 @example
7941 libxxx.dll.a
7942 xxx.dll.a
7943 libxxx.a
7944 xxx.lib
7945 cygxxx.dll (*)
7946 libxxx.dll
7947 xxx.dll
7948 @end example
7949
7950 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7951
7952 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7953 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7954 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7955 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7956 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7957
7958 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7959 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7960 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7961 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7962 could coexist on the same machine.
7963
7964 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7965 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7966 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7967
7968 @example
7969 bin/
7970 cygxxx.dll
7971 lib/
7972 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7973 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7974 @end example
7975
7976 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7977 done two ways:
7978
7979 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7980 @example
7981 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7982 @end example
7983
7984 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7985 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7986 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7987 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7988
7989 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7990 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7991 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7992 making the app/dll.
7993
7994 @example
7995 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7996 @end example
7997
7998 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7999
8000 @example
8001 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8002 @end example
8003
8004 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8005 perfectly legal
8006
8007 @example
8008 bin/
8009 cygxxx-5.dll
8010 lib/
8011 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8012 @end example
8013
8014 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8015 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8016 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8017
8018 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8019 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8020
8021 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8022 work with auto-imported data.
8023
8024 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8025 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8026 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8027 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8028 possible to do this without an import lib.
8029
8030 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8031 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8032 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8033 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8034
8035 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8036 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8037 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8038 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8039 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8040 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8041 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8042
8043 @item symbol aliasing
8044 @table @emph
8045 @item adding additional names
8046 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8047 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8048 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8049 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8050 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8051
8052 @example
8053 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8054
8055 EXPORTS
8056 foo
8057 _foo = foo
8058 @end example
8059
8060 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8061
8062 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8063 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8064
8065 @example
8066 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8067 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8068 @end example
8069
8070 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8071 symbols.
8072
8073 @item renaming symbols
8074 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8075 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8076 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8077 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8078 created). In the following example:
8079
8080 @example
8081 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8082
8083 EXPORTS
8084 _foo = foo
8085 @end example
8086
8087 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8088 @samp{_foo}.
8089 @end table
8090
8091 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8092 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8093 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8094 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8095 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8096 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8097 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8098 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8099 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8100 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8101 which is probably not what you wanted.
8102
8103 @cindex weak externals
8104 @item weak externals
8105 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8106 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8107 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8108 are three variants of weak externals:
8109 @itemize
8110 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8111 called lazy externals.
8112 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8113 This form is not presently implemented.
8114 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8115 implemented.
8116 @end itemize
8117 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8118 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8119 uses a default value.
8120
8121 @cindex aligned common symbols
8122 @item aligned common symbols
8123 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8124 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8125 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8126 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8127 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8128 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8129 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8130 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8131
8132 @end table
8133
8134 @ifclear GENERIC
8135 @lowersections
8136 @end ifclear
8137 @end ifset
8138
8139 @ifset XTENSA
8140 @ifclear GENERIC
8141 @raisesections
8142 @end ifclear
8143
8144 @node Xtensa
8145 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8146
8147 @cindex Xtensa processors
8148 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8149 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8150 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8151 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8152 example, with the command:
8153
8154 @smallexample
8155 SECTIONS
8156 @{
8157 .text : @{
8158 *(.literal .text)
8159 @}
8160 @}
8161 @end smallexample
8162
8163 @noindent
8164 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8165 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8166 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8167 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8168 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8169 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8170 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8171
8172 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8173 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8174 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8175 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8176 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8177 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8178 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8179 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8180 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8181 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8182 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8183 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8184
8185 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8186 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8187 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8188 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8189 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8190 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8191 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8192 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8193 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8194 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8195 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8196 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8197 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8198 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8199
8200 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8201 control the linker:
8202
8203 @cindex Xtensa options
8204 @table @option
8205 @item --size-opt
8206 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8207 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8208 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8209 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8210 preserve the correctness of the code.
8211 @end table
8212
8213 @ifclear GENERIC
8214 @lowersections
8215 @end ifclear
8216 @end ifset
8217
8218 @ifclear SingleFormat
8219 @node BFD
8220 @chapter BFD
8221
8222 @cindex back end
8223 @cindex object file management
8224 @cindex object formats available
8225 @kindex objdump -i
8226 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8227 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8228 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8229 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8230 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8231 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8232 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8233 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8234 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8235
8236 @cindex BFD requirements
8237 @cindex requirements for BFD
8238 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8239 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8240 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8241 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8242 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8243 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8244 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8245
8246 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8247 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8248 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8249 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8250
8251 @menu
8252 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8253 @end menu
8254
8255 @node BFD outline
8256 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8257 @cindex opening object files
8258 @include bfdsumm.texi
8259 @end ifclear
8260
8261 @node Reporting Bugs
8262 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8263 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8264 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8265
8266 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8267
8268 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8269 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8270 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8271 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8272 @command{ld}.
8273
8274 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8275 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8276
8277 @menu
8278 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8279 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8280 @end menu
8281
8282 @node Bug Criteria
8283 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8284 @cindex bug criteria
8285
8286 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8287
8288 @itemize @bullet
8289 @cindex fatal signal
8290 @cindex linker crash
8291 @cindex crash of linker
8292 @item
8293 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8294 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8295
8296 @cindex error on valid input
8297 @item
8298 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8299
8300 @cindex invalid input
8301 @item
8302 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8303 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8304 object files are correct.
8305
8306 @item
8307 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8308 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8309 @end itemize
8310
8311 @node Bug Reporting
8312 @section How to Report Bugs
8313 @cindex bug reports
8314 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8315
8316 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8317 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8318 recommend you contact that organization first.
8319
8320 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8321 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8322 distribution.
8323
8324 @ifset BUGURL
8325 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8326 @value{BUGURL}.
8327 @end ifset
8328
8329 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8330 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8331 fact or leave it out, state it!
8332
8333 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8334 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8335 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8336 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8337 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8338 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8339 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8340 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8341 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8342 and the most helpful.
8343
8344 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8345 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8346 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8347
8348 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8349 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8350 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8351 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8352
8353 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8354
8355 @itemize @bullet
8356 @item
8357 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8358 the @samp{--version} argument.
8359
8360 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8361 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8362
8363 @item
8364 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8365 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8366
8367 @item
8368 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8369 version number.
8370
8371 @item
8372 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8373 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8374
8375 @item
8376 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8377 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8378 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8379 sufficient.
8380
8381 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8382 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8383
8384 @item
8385 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8386 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8387 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8388 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8389 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8390 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8391 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8392 attachments are best.
8393
8394 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8395 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8396 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8397 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8398 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8399
8400 @item
8401 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8402 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8403
8404 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8405 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8406 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8407 a chance to make a mistake.
8408
8409 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8410 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8411 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8412 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8413 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8414 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8415 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8416 any conclusion from our observations.
8417
8418 @item
8419 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8420 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8421 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8422 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8423 context, not by line number.
8424
8425 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8426 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8427 @end itemize
8428
8429 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8430
8431 @itemize @bullet
8432 @item
8433 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8434
8435 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8436 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8437 changes will not affect it.
8438
8439 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8440 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8441 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8442 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8443
8444 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8445 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8446 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8447 less time, and so on.
8448
8449 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8450 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8451
8452 @item
8453 A patch for the bug.
8454
8455 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8456 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8457 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8458 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8459
8460 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8461 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8462 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8463 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8464 fixed.
8465
8466 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8467 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8468 help us to understand.
8469
8470 @item
8471 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8472
8473 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8474 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8475 @end itemize
8476
8477 @node MRI
8478 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8479 @cindex MRI compatibility
8480 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8481 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8482 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8483 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8484 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8485 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8486 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8487
8488 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8489 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8490 features to make use of them.
8491
8492 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8493 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8494
8495 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8496 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8497 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8498 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8499 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8500
8501 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8502
8503 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8504 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8505 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8506
8507 @table @code
8508 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8509 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8510 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8511 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8512 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8513 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8514 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8515 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8516 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8517 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8518 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8519
8520 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8521 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8522 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8523 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8524
8525 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8526
8527 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8528 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8529 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8530 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8531
8532 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8533 @item BASE @var{expression}
8534 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8535 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8536
8537 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8538 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8539 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8540 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8541
8542 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8543 @item END
8544 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8545
8546 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8547 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8548 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8549 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8550
8551 @enumerate
8552 @item
8553 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8554
8555 @item
8556 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8557
8558 @item
8559 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8560 @samp{COFF}
8561 @end enumerate
8562
8563 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8564 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8565 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8566 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8567
8568 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8569 same line, with no change in its effect.
8570
8571 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8572 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8573 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8574 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8575 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8576 command line.
8577
8578 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8579 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8580 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8581 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8582 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8583
8584 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8585 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8586 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8587 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8588 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8589 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8590 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8591 file, in the order specified.
8592
8593 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8594 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8595 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8596 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8597 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8598 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8599
8600 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8601 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8602 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8603 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8604 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8605 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8606 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8607 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8608 @end table
8609
8610 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8611 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8612 @include fdl.texi
8613
8614 @node LD Index
8615 @unnumbered LD Index
8616
8617 @printindex cp
8618
8619 @tex
8620 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8621 % meantime:
8622 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8623 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8624 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8625 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8626 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8627 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8628 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8629 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8630 \page\colophon
8631 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8632 @end tex
8633
8634 @bye